WO2024093572A1 - 用于呈现文档的方法、装置、设备和存储介质 - Google Patents

用于呈现文档的方法、装置、设备和存储介质 Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2024093572A1
WO2024093572A1 PCT/CN2023/120499 CN2023120499W WO2024093572A1 WO 2024093572 A1 WO2024093572 A1 WO 2024093572A1 CN 2023120499 W CN2023120499 W CN 2023120499W WO 2024093572 A1 WO2024093572 A1 WO 2024093572A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
view
document
content
presentation
page
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2023/120499
Other languages
English (en)
French (fr)
Inventor
王鸿云
黎俊聪
徐紫卿
王霄慧
常浩
Original Assignee
北京字跳网络技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from CN202211351629.1A external-priority patent/CN115640782A/zh
Priority claimed from CN202211351678.5A external-priority patent/CN115640783A/zh
Priority claimed from CN202211351337.8A external-priority patent/CN115659909A/zh
Priority claimed from CN202211345566.9A external-priority patent/CN115657903A/zh
Application filed by 北京字跳网络技术有限公司 filed Critical 北京字跳网络技术有限公司
Publication of WO2024093572A1 publication Critical patent/WO2024093572A1/zh

Links

Classifications

    • G—PHYSICS
    • G06—COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06F—ELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F40/00—Handling natural language data
    • G06F40/10—Text processing
    • G06F40/103—Formatting, i.e. changing of presentation of documents
    • G06F40/106—Display of layout of documents; Previewing

Definitions

  • the various embodiments of the present disclosure generally relate to the field of computers, and in particular, to methods, apparatuses, devices and computer-readable storage media for presenting documents, methods, apparatuses, devices and computer-readable storage media for document demonstration, methods, apparatuses, devices and computer-readable storage media for document interaction, and methods, apparatuses, devices and computer-readable storage media for displaying document content.
  • Documents are used in many aspects of people's lives, work and social life, including Document presentation. For example, in conference reports, corporate publicity, product promotion, event presentations, etc., it is often necessary to present the various contents of a document. However, traditional document presentation does not support interaction between viewers and documents.
  • a method for presenting a document is provided.
  • a first view of a document is presented, the document includes at least one content block, and the at least one content block has a presentation attribute.
  • the presentation attribute of the at least one content block is adjusted. Further, based on the adjusted presentation attribute, the at least one content block is presented in the second view.
  • a device for presenting a document includes an original presentation module.
  • the original presentation module is configured to present a first view of a document, the document including at least one content block, and the at least one content block has a presentation attribute.
  • the device further includes an adjustment module, which is configured to adjust the presentation attribute of the at least one content block in response to receiving an indication for presenting a second view of the document.
  • the device also includes a target presentation module, which is configured to present the at least one content block in the second view based on the adjusted presentation attribute.
  • an electronic device includes at least one processing unit; and at least one memory, the at least one memory is coupled to the at least one processing unit and stores instructions for execution by the at least one processing unit.
  • the device performs the method according to the first aspect of the present disclosure.
  • a computer-readable storage medium stores a computer program, which can be executed by a processor. To perform the method according to the first aspect of the present disclosure.
  • a method for document presentation includes, in response to receiving a switching indication in an editing page of the document, presenting a presentation page of the document, the presentation page including a view of a content item input in the document.
  • the method also includes, in response to detecting a trigger indication for the view, presenting the content item in the presentation page.
  • a method for document presentation includes determining the current page type of the document in response to receiving a trigger indication for a view of a content item in the document.
  • the method also includes jumping to a page other than the edit page to present the content item in response to the page type being an edit page.
  • the method also includes presenting the content item in the presentation page in response to the page type being a presentation page.
  • a device for document presentation includes a presentation page presentation module configured to present a presentation page of the document in response to receiving a switching indication in an editing page of the document, the presentation page including a view of a content item input in the document.
  • the device also includes a content item presentation module configured to present a content item in the presentation page in response to detecting a trigger indication for the view.
  • a device for document presentation includes a page type determination module configured to determine the current page type of the document in response to receiving a trigger indication of a view of a content item in the document.
  • the device also includes a page jump module configured to jump to a page other than the edit page to present the content item in response to the page type being an edit page.
  • the device also includes a presentation page presentation module configured to present the content item in the presentation page in response to the page type being a presentation page.
  • an electronic device in a fifth aspect of the present disclosure, includes at least one processing unit; and at least one memory, the at least one memory is coupled to the at least one processing unit and stores instructions for execution by the at least one processing unit. When the instructions are executed by the at least one processing unit, the device executes the method of the first aspect or the second aspect.
  • a computer-readable storage medium wherein a computer program is stored on the medium, and the computer program can be executed by a processor to implement the method of the first aspect or the second aspect.
  • a document interaction method comprises: At the first terminal device, access path information of the document is presented in a presentation view of the document while the document is being presented; and based on an access request including the access path information initiated by at least one second terminal device, the presentation view of the document is provided to at least one second terminal device.
  • a method for document interaction comprises: obtaining access path information of a document at a second terminal device, the document being presented at a first terminal device; sending an access request for the document, the access request including the access path information; receiving a presentation view of the document; and presenting the presentation view of the document in a presentation mode.
  • a first device for document interaction includes: an access path presentation module configured to present access path information of a document in a presentation view of the document while the document is being presented; and a view providing module configured to send the document to at least one second device based on an access request including the access path information initiated by at least one second device.
  • a second device for document interaction includes: an access acquisition module configured to acquire access path information of a document, the document being presented at a first device; a request initiation module configured to send an access request for the document, the access request including the access path information; a view receiving module configured to receive a presentation view of the document; and a view presenting module configured to present the presentation view of the document in a presentation mode.
  • an electronic device in a sixth aspect of the present disclosure, includes at least one processing unit; and at least one memory, the at least one memory is coupled to the at least one processing unit and stores instructions for execution by the at least one processing unit. When the instructions are executed by the at least one processing unit, the electronic device executes the method of the first aspect or the second aspect.
  • a computer-readable storage medium wherein a computer program is stored on the computer-readable storage medium, and the computer program can be executed by a processor to implement the method of the first aspect or the second aspect.
  • a method for displaying document content comprises receiving, in a current view of the document, a target content block in a content block in the document; The method further includes receiving a content presentation instruction for the target content block when the target content block is determined. The method further includes generating a target view including at least one content page based on the target content block. The content of the target content block is displayed in at least one content page.
  • a device for document content display includes a target content block determination module, which is configured to receive a selection operation of a target content block in a content block within a document under a current view of the document, and determine the target content block.
  • the device also includes a content presentation instruction receiving module, which is configured to receive a content presentation instruction for the target content block when the target content block is determined.
  • the device also includes a target view generation module, which is configured to generate a target view including at least one content page based on the target content block. The content of the target content block is displayed in at least one content page.
  • an electronic device in a third aspect of the present disclosure, includes at least one processing unit; and at least one memory, the at least one memory is coupled to the at least one processing unit and stores instructions for execution by the at least one processing unit. When the instructions are executed by the at least one processing unit, the device executes the method of the first aspect.
  • a computer-readable storage medium wherein a computer program is stored on the medium, and the computer program can be executed by a processor to implement the method of the first aspect.
  • FIG1A shows a schematic diagram of an example environment in which various embodiments of the present disclosure can be implemented
  • FIG. 1B shows a method for presenting a document according to some embodiments of the present disclosure. flow chart
  • FIG1C shows a schematic diagram of a document view of a document according to some embodiments of the present disclosure
  • FIG1D shows a schematic diagram of a presentation view of a document according to some embodiments of the present disclosure
  • FIG. 1E is a schematic diagram showing another presentation view of a document according to some embodiments of the present disclosure.
  • FIG1F shows a schematic diagram of a mind map view of a document according to some embodiments of the present disclosure
  • 1GA and 1GB respectively show schematic diagrams of editing a mind map according to some embodiments of the present disclosure
  • 1HA and 1HB respectively show schematic diagrams of editing a mind map according to some embodiments of the present disclosure
  • 11A and 11B respectively show schematic diagrams of editing a mind map according to some embodiments of the present disclosure
  • 1JA and 1JB respectively show schematic diagrams of editing a mind map according to some embodiments of the present disclosure
  • 1KA and 1KB respectively show schematic diagrams of editing a mind map according to some embodiments of the present disclosure
  • 10A and 10B respectively show schematic diagrams of a document view and a mind map view of a document according to some embodiments of the present disclosure
  • FIG. 1P illustrates a block diagram of an example apparatus for presenting a document according to some embodiments of the present disclosure
  • FIG2A shows a schematic diagram of an example environment in which embodiments of the present disclosure can be implemented
  • FIG2B illustrates a flow chart of a process for document presentation according to some embodiments of the present disclosure
  • 2C is a schematic diagram showing an example of presenting content items in a browsing window according to some embodiments of the present disclosure
  • 2DA to 2DB are schematic diagrams showing examples of interactions for a presentation page according to an embodiment of the present disclosure
  • 2EA to 2EF are schematic diagrams showing examples of presentation pages for document presentation according to some embodiments of the present disclosure.
  • 2FA to 2FC are schematic diagrams showing examples of interactions for editing a view of a content item according to an embodiment of the present disclosure
  • 2G shows a schematic diagram of yet another interaction example for editing a view of a content item according to some embodiments of the present disclosure
  • FIG2H illustrates a flow chart of another process for document presentation according to some embodiments of the present disclosure
  • FIG2I shows a block diagram of an apparatus for document presentation according to some embodiments of the present disclosure
  • FIG2J shows a block diagram of another apparatus for document presentation according to some embodiments of the present disclosure.
  • FIG3A shows a schematic diagram of an example environment in which embodiments of the present disclosure can be implemented
  • FIG3B shows a flow chart of a signaling flow for document interaction according to some embodiments of the present disclosure
  • 3CA to 3CD are schematic diagrams showing examples of interaction of pages for document interaction according to some embodiments of the present disclosure.
  • 3DA to 3DH are schematic diagrams showing examples of interaction of pages for document interaction according to other embodiments of the present disclosure.
  • FIG3E illustrates a flow chart of a process for document interaction according to some embodiments of the present disclosure
  • FIG3F shows a flowchart of a process for document interaction according to other embodiments of the present disclosure.
  • FIG3G shows a block diagram of a first apparatus for document interaction according to some embodiments of the present disclosure
  • FIG. 3H shows a second device for document interaction according to some embodiments of the present disclosure. Block diagram of the device
  • FIG4A shows a schematic diagram of an example environment in which embodiments of the present disclosure can be implemented
  • FIG4B shows a flow chart of a process for document content display according to some embodiments of the present disclosure
  • 4CA to 4CF are schematic diagrams showing examples of selecting a target content block of a document according to some embodiments of the present disclosure
  • 4DA to 4DE are schematic diagrams showing examples of interactions for screening target content blocks of a document according to an embodiment of the present disclosure
  • FIG4E is a schematic diagram showing an example of interacting with a target content block of a selected document according to an embodiment of the present disclosure
  • 4FA to 4FB are schematic diagrams showing examples of presentation interfaces for document content display according to some embodiments of the present disclosure.
  • FIG4G shows a block diagram of an apparatus for document content display according to some embodiments of the present disclosure.
  • FIG4H illustrates a block diagram of an electronic device capable of implementing various embodiments of the present disclosure.
  • the term "in response to” refers to a state in which a corresponding event occurs or a condition is satisfied. It will be understood that the timing of executing a subsequent action executed in response to the event or condition is not necessarily strongly related to the time when the event occurs or the condition is satisfied. For example, in some cases, the subsequent action may be executed immediately when the event occurs or the condition is satisfied; while in other cases, the subsequent action may be executed some time after the event occurs or the condition is satisfied.
  • a prompt message is sent to the user to clearly prompt the user that the operation requested to be performed will require obtaining and using the user's personal information, so that the user can independently choose whether to provide personal information to software or hardware such as electronic devices, applications, servers or storage media that perform operations of the technical solution of the present disclosure based on the prompt message.
  • the prompt information in response to receiving an active request from the user, is sent to the user in a manner such as a pop-up window, in which the prompt information can be presented in text form.
  • the pop-up window can also carry a selection control for the user to choose "agree” or “disagree” to provide personal information to the electronic device.
  • documents are widely used in daily office work, and different usage scenarios often have different requirements for the presentation of documents.
  • it is usually expected to present the document content in the form of a page layout, and there are certain requirements for the style and layout of the document content.
  • it is usually expected to present the document content in a hierarchical structure such as a tree structure.
  • Conventional document formats can often only Meet the needs of specific usage scenarios. For example, a presentation format that presents documents in the form of slides is suitable for presentation reports, and a document in the form of a mind map is suitable for organizing ideas.
  • converting documents between different formats is often time-consuming and inefficient, and the quality of the resulting documents, such as the layout, typesetting, and style of the document, is often unsatisfactory.
  • a technical solution for generating a directory for a document has been proposed, but the directory structure is not suitable for users to organize their thoughts and adjust the document content.
  • the presentation view obtained by this solution only enlarges and focuses the document, without considering factors such as layout, typesetting and style in the presentation mode, and cannot well meet the user's needs for the presentation scene. Therefore, it is expected that high-quality switching between multiple different views of the same document can be achieved.
  • an improved document presentation solution is provided. Specifically, instead of managing document content in a streaming manner, the present disclosure can manage documents in a content block manner.
  • a document includes multiple content blocks with corresponding presentation attributes. After receiving an indication of view switching, the presentation attributes of the relevant content blocks can be adjusted, and these content blocks are presented based on the adjusted presentation attributes, thereby achieving view switching of the document.
  • FIG. 1A shows a schematic diagram of an example environment 1100 in which various embodiments of the present disclosure can be implemented.
  • an electronic device 1110 can present a document 1112 to a user 1102, for example, through a document presentation interface 1120.
  • the document 1112 can be stored in an electronic device 1110.
  • the document 1112 may be an online document and may be stored in another electronic device communicatively connected to the electronic device 1110, such as a cloud storage.
  • the scope of the present disclosure is not limited in this respect.
  • the document presentation interface 1120 may be provided by a document editing application in the electronic device 1110.
  • the document presentation interface 1120 may have a display area suitable for the display area size of the electronic device 1110, or may have other appropriate predetermined or user 1102 specified display area.
  • user 1102 may interact with electronic device 1110.
  • user 1102 may perform operations such as editing and presenting on document 1112 in document presentation interface 1120 by interacting with electronic device 1110.
  • operations such as editing and presenting on document 1112 in document presentation interface 1120 by interacting with electronic device 1110.
  • Various interaction processes between user 1102 and electronic device 1110 will be described in detail below.
  • Electronic device 1110 can be any type of mobile terminal, fixed terminal or portable terminal, including mobile phone, desktop computer, laptop computer, notebook computer, netbook computer, tablet computer, media computer, multimedia tablet, personal communication system (PCS) device, personal navigation device, personal digital assistant (PDA), audio/video player, digital camera/camcorder, positioning device, television receiver, radio broadcast receiver, e-book device, game device or any combination of the foregoing, including accessories and peripherals of these devices or any combination thereof.
  • electronic device 1110 can also support any type of interface for user 1102 (such as "wearable" circuit, etc.). It should be understood that the structure and function of environment 1100 are described only for exemplary purposes, without implying any limitation on the scope of the present disclosure.
  • FIG1B shows a flow chart of a method 1200 for presenting a document 1112 according to some embodiments of the present disclosure.
  • the method 1200 may be performed by the electronic device 1110 shown in FIG1A. It should be understood that the method 1200 may also include additional blocks not shown and/or may omit one (or some) of the blocks shown, and the scope of the present disclosure is not limited in this respect.
  • a first view of document 1112 is presented.
  • document 1112 includes at least one content block, and each of the at least one content block has a presentation attribute.
  • electronic device 1110 may present a document view of document 1112 in document presentation interface 1120. is the first view.
  • content block refers to an entity in the document 1112, which includes but is not limited to at least any of the following: text, image, video, table, graphic, link, annotation, symbol, formula and other content, and the entity has presentation attributes.
  • the presentation attributes of the content block can be used to control whether the content block is presented in the view of the document 1112, and to control the manner in which the content block is presented in the view of the document 1112.
  • the presentation attributes of the content block may include but are not limited to at least any of the following: level, width, height, font, font size, border, line, fill and alignment. It should be understood that the presentation attributes may also include any other suitable attributes, and the scope of the present disclosure is not limited in this respect.
  • FIG. 1C shows a schematic diagram of a document view 1300 of a document 1112 according to some embodiments of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 1C shows a schematic diagram of a document view 1300 of a document 1112 according to some embodiments of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 1C shows a schematic diagram of a document view 1300 of a document 1112 according to some embodiments of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 1C shows a schematic diagram of a document view 1300 of a document 1112 according to some embodiments of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 1C shows a schematic diagram of a document view 1300 of a document 1112 according to some embodiments of the present disclosure.
  • the document 1112 exemplarily includes thirteen content blocks, namely, content blocks 1310-1 to 1310-13 (individually or collectively referred to as content blocks 1310), wherein content blocks 1310-1 to 1310-12 are content blocks of document type, and content block 1310-13 is a content block of image type.
  • content blocks 1310-1 to 1310-13 are content blocks of document type
  • content block 1310-13 is a content block of image type.
  • FIG. 1C only thirteen content blocks 1310 in the document 1112 are shown in FIG. 1C . It should be understood that the document 1112 may have fewer or more content blocks 1310.
  • the type of the content block 1310 of the document 1112 is text or image, in other embodiments, the type of the content block 1310 may also be a table, a graph, a link, an annotation, a symbol, a formula, and the like.
  • specific text is presented in the accompanying drawings, such text does not constitute any limitation to the embodiments of the present disclosure.
  • the presentation attributes and configuration of content block 1310-1 in FIG. 1C are: the font is bold, the font size is size 3, and the level is the document title.
  • the presentation attributes and configuration of content blocks 1310-3, 1310-5, 1310-7, and 1310-11 are: the font is bold, the font size is size 3, and the level is the document title.
  • the font is bold, the font size is size 3, and the level is a first-level title.
  • the presentation attributes and configuration of content block 1310-9 are: the font is bold, the font size is size 4, and the level is a second-level title.
  • the presentation attributes and configuration of content blocks 1310-2, 1310-4, 1310-6, 1310-8, 1310-10, and 1310-12 are: the font is regular, the font size is size 4, and the level is text.
  • view control 1320-1 corresponds to a view of a mind map type
  • view control 1320-2 corresponds to a view of a streaming type
  • view control 1320-3 corresponds to a view of a presentation type.
  • a view of a mind map type may also be referred to as a mind map view
  • a view of a streaming type may also be referred to as a document view
  • a view of a presentation type may also be referred to as a presentation view.
  • view control 1320-2 presents an activated state
  • view control 1320-1 and view control 1320-3 present an unactivated state.
  • view control 1320 shown in FIG. 1C is merely schematic, and view switching may be controlled in any other suitable manner (for example, the user may press a predetermined shortcut key or perform a predetermined gesture), and the scope of the present disclosure is not limited in this respect.
  • the presentation mode of the document can be switched between a first view and a second view.
  • the first view can be any view of a document view, a presentation view, or a mind map view
  • the second view can be another view of the document view, the presentation view, or the mind map view that is different from the first view.
  • the embodiments of the present disclosure will be described below by taking the first view as a document view and the second view as a presentation view or a mind map view as an example.
  • the solutions according to the embodiments of the present disclosure can also be applied to any other suitable type of view, and the scope of the present disclosure is not limited in this respect.
  • a presentation property of at least one content block is adjusted.
  • the instruction may be a specific operation of user 1102 on view control 1320, such as a mouse click, a mouse double-click, a mouse selection, a mouse hover, a finger or stylus touch, a finger or stylus touch, or a touch operation.
  • 1C to describe more details about the indication.
  • the user 1102 can indicate switching to the presentation view by controlling the mouse arrow 1330 and clicking the view control 1320 - 3 .
  • electronic device 1110 may determine the type of the second view based on the indication of the second view for presenting document 1112, and adjust the presentation properties of at least one content block 1310 based on the type of the second view. Referring to FIG1C , if a trigger indication of view control 1320-3 is received from user 1102, electronic device 1110 may determine, based on the indication, that user 1102 clicked on view control 1320-3, and determine that the second view type to be presented indicates a presentation type according to view control 1320-3 corresponding to a presentation view.
  • the electronic device 1110 may adjust the position, size and/or display content of at least one content block 1310 in the second view.
  • FIG. 1D shows a schematic diagram of a presentation view 1400 of a document 1112 according to some embodiments of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 1D schematically shows only the first three pages of the document 1112 in the presentation view, namely page 1410-1, page 1410-2, and page 1410-3.
  • the position of the content block 1310-1 is adjusted in the presentation view to be centered at the bottom of the first page 1410-1.
  • the electronic device 1110 also adjusts the font of the content block 1310-1 to Lishu, and adjusts the font size to one according to the window size, and so on.
  • the electronic device 1110 can also increase the size of the picture-type content block 1310-13 to serve as the background of the first page 1410-1.
  • the electronic device 1110 can also generate the English expression "Animal” corresponding to the title "Animal” by means of machine translation, and adjust the display content of the content block 1310-1 in the presentation view to "Animal".
  • each content block 1310 in the document 1112 can be effectively adapted to the presentation form of the presentation view, and a more beautiful design of the presentation view can be automatically provided, thereby reducing the workload of the user 1102 in designing the presentation document and improving the user experience.
  • the electronic device 1110 may further adjust the combined layout of at least one content block 1310.
  • the electronic device 1110 can combine and layout the content blocks of the first type and the content blocks of the second type by adjusting the position and size of the content block 1310-13 of the picture type to set it as the background of the content block 1310-1 of the text type.
  • the content block 1310-1 can, for example, correspond to the content block of the first type
  • the content block 1310-13 can, for example, correspond to the content block of the second type.
  • the generated presentation view can be beautified by means of the matching of different types of content blocks 1310 in the document 1112 to improve the aesthetics of the presentation document.
  • the electronic device 1110 can combine and layout the multiple content blocks 1310.
  • the electronic device 1110 can combine and layout the two content blocks.
  • the electronic device 1110 presents content block 1310-3 and content block 1310-5 in the third page 1410-3 in the form of a left-right combined layout.
  • the electronic device 1110 can combine and layout multiple content blocks 1310 of the same type.
  • the electronic device 1110 in addition to presenting content blocks 1310-3 and content blocks 1310-5 in the form of left-right layout, the electronic device 1110 also combines content blocks 1310-4 and 1310-6 of the same text type, and presents them in combination with content blocks 1310-3 and content blocks 1310-5.
  • the content blocks 1310 of the same type in the document 1112 can be fully utilized to construct the generated presentation view to improve the aesthetics of the presentation document.
  • the electronic device 1110 may combine and lay out the multiple content blocks 1310 of the same type.
  • the preset conditions include, but are not limited to, the semantic similarity of the contents of the multiple content blocks 1310, Or the lengths of multiple content blocks 1310 are similar, and the scope of the present disclosure is not limited in this respect.
  • the electronic device 1110 can present content blocks 1310-4 and 1310-6 in a left-right layout.
  • the association between content blocks 1310 of the same type in the document 1112 can be fully utilized to design the generated presentation view to improve the aesthetics of the presentation document.
  • the electronic device 1110 may also present a paging control element for adjusting paging in the presentation view.
  • FIG. 1D exemplarily shows two paging control elements 1420-1 and 1420-2 (individually or collectively referred to as paging control elements 1420) in the form of arrows. It should be understood that the paging control element 1420 may also be presented in any other suitable form, and the scope of the present disclosure is not limited in this respect.
  • the electronic device 1110 can adjust the paging of the presentation view.
  • the user 1102 can move the paging control element 1420-2 downward to the horizontal position between the content block 1310-3 and the content block 1310-4.
  • the electronic device 1110 can adjust the paging layout shown in Figure 1D.
  • the resulting new presentation view is shown in Figure 1E.
  • content block 1310-3 and content block 1310-5 are presented in the second page 1510-2 of the presentation view 1500
  • content block 1310-4 and content block 1310-6 are presented in the third page 1510-3 of the presentation view 1500.
  • the user 1102 can conveniently adjust the paging layout in the presentation view, so that the user can adjust the paging layout mode with a finer granularity at any time to improve the user experience.
  • the electronic device 1110 may also present a visibility control element in the presentation view, for example, it may be presented when the mouse hovers over the content block (not shown). If an adjustment to the visibility control element presented in the presentation view is received, the electronic device 1110 may adjust the visibility of at least one content block 1310. For example, the electronic device 1110 may adjust the visibility by changing the transparency of the content block 1310. In this way, the user 1102 can conveniently hide or fade one or more content blocks in the presentation view. 1310, thereby improving the simplicity and aesthetics of presentation documents.
  • the electronic device 1110 may also present a comment control element in the presentation view, for example, it may be presented when the mouse hovers over the content block (not shown). If an adjustment to the comment control element presented in the presentation view is received, the electronic device 1110 may adjust the comments for at least one content block 1310. For example, the electronic device 1110 may present all comments obtained in the comment control element for one content block 1310 in the user interface of the presentation document author. In this way, multiple viewers of the presentation document can comment on the presentation document at the same time, and all comments can be fed back to the author of the presentation document in a timely manner, thereby improving the user experience.
  • the electronic device 1110 may also present a color control element in the presentation view, for example, it may be presented when the mouse hovers over the content block (not shown). If an adjustment to the color control element presented in the presentation view is received, the electronic device 1110 may adjust the color of at least one content block 1310. For example, the user 1102 may change the color of the text content "animal" in the content block 1310-1 by adjusting the color control element. In this way, the user 1102 may conveniently change the color of each content block 1310 in the presentation view, thereby improving the aesthetics of the presentation document.
  • the electronic device 1110 may also assign an icon to at least one content block 1310 based on the text content of at least one content block 1310, and present the icon at a position associated with at least one content block 1310.
  • the electronic device 1110 may present icons of mammals such as lions and tigers next to the text "mammals"; for content block 1310-5, the electronic device 1110 may present icons of reptiles such as crocodiles next to the text "reptiles"; and so on.
  • the electronic device 1110 may present a clock icon next to the content block 1310 in the presentation view.
  • the electronic device 1110 may present a shield icon next to the content block 1310 in the presentation view.
  • the method for presenting document 1112 can automatically complete the selection of layout, typesetting and style in the presentation view, and based on the content block 1310, the display method of the content in document 1112 can be adjusted with a finer granularity, thereby enhancing the aesthetics of document 1112 in the presentation view and improving the user experience.
  • the user 1102 can indicate switching to the mind map view by controlling the mouse arrow 1330 to click the view control 1320-1. It should be understood that the form of indication used herein is not limited in this respect.
  • the electronic device 1110 may determine the title level of at least one content block 1310 in the document view.
  • the "title level” may also be referred to as “level” in this article.
  • the electronic device 1110 may determine based on the presentation attributes of each content block 1310: the level of content block 1310-1 is the document title; the levels of content blocks 1310-3, 1310-5, 1310-7, and 1310-11 are first-level titles; the level of content block 1310-9 is a second-level title; the levels of content blocks 1310-2, 1310-4, 1310-6, 1310-8, 1310-10, 1310-12, and 1310-13 are text.
  • the electronic device 1110 can adjust the presentation attributes of at least one content block based on the title level, and display at least one content block with the adjusted presentation attributes in the mind map view.
  • the electronic device can present the content block 1310 that meets the predetermined level condition in the created mind map.
  • the presentation attribute can also include a mind map display attribute indicating whether the content block 1310 is presented in the mind map.
  • the electronic device 1110 can set the mind map display attribute of the content block 1310 based on whether the level of the content block 1310 meets the predetermined level condition.
  • the electronic device 1110 can determine, based on the predetermined hierarchical condition, that the following content blocks 1310 with the hierarchical level of the document title and the hierarchical level of the first-level title need to be presented in the mind map.
  • the predetermined hierarchical condition that the following content blocks 1310 with the hierarchical level of the document title and the hierarchical level of the first-level title need to be presented in the mind map.
  • the electronic device 1110 can The mind map display properties of content block 1310-1, content block 1310-3, content block 1310-5, content block 1310-7 and content block 1310-11 are set to: present the corresponding content block 1310 in the mind map.
  • electronic device 1110 can set the mind map display properties of content block 1310-2, content block 1310-4, content block 1310-6, content block 1310-8, content block 1310-9, content block 1310-10, content block 1310-12 and content block 1310-13 to: not present the above content block 1310 in the mind map.
  • At least one content block is presented in the second view based on the adjusted presentation attribute.
  • the electronic device 1110 can generate a node corresponding to the content block 1310 based on the content block 1310 to be presented in the mind map, and determine the hierarchical structure of each node in the mind map based on the title level of the content block 1310, thereby presenting each node in the mind map based on the hierarchical structure.
  • the display mode of the document 1112 can be switched without changing the document content itself, and there is no need to convert the document format. Therefore, it is convenient for users to organize their thoughts in the mind map view, thereby editing the document structure more efficiently.
  • FIG. 1F shows a schematic diagram of a mind map view 1600 of a document 1112 according to some embodiments of the present disclosure.
  • the mind map 1610 in FIG. 1F includes five nodes, namely nodes 1620-1 to 1620-5 (individually or collectively referred to as nodes 1620). The following will be described by comparing FIG. 1C and FIG. 1F.
  • the electronic device 1110 can determine, according to the mind map display attribute in the presentation attributes of the content blocks 1310-1 to 1310-13, that the content blocks 1310-1, 1310-3, 1310-5, 1310-7, and 1310-11 need to be presented in the mind map 1610.
  • the electronic device 1110 can generate corresponding nodes 1620 based on the above-mentioned content blocks 1310, respectively.
  • the node 1620-1 in FIG. 1F corresponds to the content block 1310-1
  • the node 1620-2 corresponds to the content block 1310-3
  • the node 1620-3 corresponds to the content block 1310-5
  • the node 1620-4 corresponds to the content block 1310-7
  • the node 1620-5 corresponds to the content block 1310-11.
  • the electronic device 1110 can determine the hierarchical structure of each node 1620 in the mind map 1610 based on the level of the content block 1310. In some embodiments, the electronic device 1110 can set the document title as the root node of the mind map 1610, and set the first-level title to the first-level node, and set the second-level title to the second-level node, and so on. With reference to the example of Figure 1C and Figure 1F, based on the level of the content block 1310-1 being the document title, the electronic device 1110 can determine that the corresponding node 1620-1 is the root node. Based on the level of the content block 1310-3 being the first-level title, the electronic device 1110 can determine that the corresponding node 1620-2 is the first-level node.
  • the electronic device 1110 can determine that node 1620-3, node 1620-4 and node 1620-5 are first-level nodes. Since the predetermined level condition mentioned above is that the level is not lower than the first-level title, the mind map 1610 of Figure 1F includes a root node and four first-level nodes.
  • the electronic device 1110 can present each node 1620 in the mind map 1610 based on the determined hierarchical structure of the node 1620.
  • nodes 1620-1 to 1620-5 are presented in a tree layout in FIG. 1F.
  • FIG. 1F only shows a two-layer tree layout, when the document 1112 includes more levels, the tree layout can also have more levels based on appropriate predetermined hierarchical conditions. For example, more classifications of mammals can also be included in the lower layer of node 1620-2, and so on. It should be understood that the electronic device 1110 can also present each node 1620 in any other suitable layout manner, and the scope of the present disclosure is not limited in this respect.
  • the mind map 1610 presents the hierarchical structure of the document 1112 in an independent page, and allows the user 1102 to sort out the ideas of editing the document 1112 based on the mind map 1610. For example, the user 1102 can adjust the hierarchy, content, and order of each content block in the mind map 1610, and so on. By presenting the mind map 1610 in an independent page, the user 1102 can focus on sorting out the structure and writing ideas of the document 1112 without being distracted by other temporarily unimportant details (e.g., content in a lower level).
  • the possibility of immersively focusing on sorting out ideas can be provided for the user 1102, thereby further improving the user experience and improving the efficiency of the user 1102 in editing the document 1112.
  • the electronic device 1110 may update the content block 1310 corresponding to the node 1620 in the mind map view accordingly.
  • content the electronic device 1110 can adjust the content of the content block corresponding to the node.
  • Figures 1GA and 1GB respectively show schematic diagrams of editing the mind map 1610 according to some embodiments of the present disclosure. As shown in the mind map view 1700A of Figure 1GA, the user 1102 can adjust the content of the node 1620-4, for example, by adding the word "water and land" in the node 1620-4, the content of the node 620-4 is edited to "amphibians".
  • the electronic device 1110 can adjust the content of the content block 1310-7 corresponding to the node 1620-4 accordingly. As shown in the document view 1700B of Figure 1GB, the electronic device 1110 can synchronously adjust the content of the content block 1310-7 to "amphibians". In the examples of Figures 1GA and 1GB, only the node 1620-4 in Figure 1GA is used as an example of the adjusted node. At this time, the content block 1310-7 in Figure 1GB can be the content block corresponding to the adjusted node. It should be understood that the above correspondence is merely illustrative and does not constitute any limitation to the embodiments of the present disclosure.
  • the user 1102 can sort out the ideas of the document 1112 in the mind map 1610, and the editing operation of the user 1102 can be synchronized with the content in the corresponding content block 1310 of the document 1112, so that the user 1102 can directly switch to other views of the document 1112 to further enrich the details of the document 1112. Therefore, the efficiency of the user 1102 in editing the document 1112 can be improved, and the user experience can be improved.
  • Figures 1HA and 1HB respectively show schematic diagrams of editing the mind map 1610 according to some embodiments of the present disclosure.
  • the user 1102 can adjust the order of nodes 1620-2 and nodes 1620-3, for example, the order of nodes 1620-2 and nodes 1620-3 is interchanged so that node 1620-3 is located before node 1620-2.
  • the electronic device 1110 can adjust the order of the content block 1310-3 corresponding to the node 1620-2 and the content block 1310-5 corresponding to the node 1620-3 accordingly.
  • the positions of the subordinate content blocks of the adjusted nodes may be changed accordingly.
  • the electronic device 1110 may also adjust the order of the content block 1310-4 associated with the content block 1310-3 and the content block 1310-6 associated with the content block 1310-5 accordingly.
  • electronic device 1110 can move content block 1310-5 and content block 1310-6 before content block 1310-3 and content block 1310-4.
  • node 1620-2 and node 1620-3 in Figure 1HA can, for example, correspond to two adjusted nodes respectively
  • content block 1310-3 and content block 1310-5 in Figure 1HB can, for example, correspond to two content blocks corresponding to the two adjusted nodes respectively. It should be understood that the above correspondence is only schematic and does not constitute any limitation to the embodiments of the present disclosure.
  • the user 1102 can sort out the ideas of the document 1112 in the mind map 1610, and the editing operation of the user 1102 can be synchronized to the corresponding content in the corresponding content block 1310 of the document 1112, so that the adjustment of the ideas of the document 1112 by the user 1102 in the mind map 1610 can be synchronized to other views of the document 1112. Therefore, the efficiency of the user 1102 in editing the document 1112 can be improved, and the user experience can be improved.
  • FIG. 1IA and 1IB respectively show schematic diagrams of editing the mind map 1610 according to some embodiments of the present disclosure.
  • the user 1102 can adjust the level of the node 1620-1, for example, the level of the node 1620-1 is adjusted from the root node to the first-level node.
  • the electronic device 1110 can adjust the level of the content block 1310-1 corresponding to the node 1620-1 accordingly.
  • the electronic device 1110 can adjust the level of the content block 1310-1 to a first-level title.
  • the electronic device 1110 can adjust other presentation attributes of the content block 1310-1, such as font and font size, to a configuration corresponding to the first-level title.
  • the node 1620-1 in Figure 1IA may correspond to the adjusted node
  • the content block 1310-1 and its hierarchical attributes in Figure 1IB may correspond to the corresponding content block and the corresponding hierarchy of the adjusted node. It should be understood that the above correspondence is only illustrative and does not constitute any limitation to the embodiments of the present disclosure.
  • the user 1102 can sort out the ideas of the document 1112 in the mind map 1610, and the editing operation of the user 1102 can be synchronized to the corresponding part of the document 1112.
  • the corresponding content in the content block 1310 is synchronized so that the adjustment of the idea of the document 1112 by the user 1102 in the mind map 1610 is synchronized to other views of the document 1112. Therefore, the efficiency of the user 1102 in editing the document 1112 can be improved, and the user experience can be improved.
  • FIGS 1JA and 1JB respectively show schematic diagrams of editing the mind map 1610 according to some embodiments of the present disclosure. As shown in the mind map view 11000A of Figure 1JA, the user 1102 has inserted a node 1620-6 into the mind map 1610. Node 1620-6 is a child node of the root node 1620-1.
  • the electronic device 1110 can insert the content block corresponding to the node in the document 1112 accordingly. Based on the fact that node 1620-6 is a child node of the root node 1620-1, the electronic device 1110 can determine that the level of the new content block is lower than the level of the content block 1310-1 corresponding to the root node 1620-1. As shown in the document view 11000B of Figure 1JB, the electronic device 1110 can insert a content block 1310-14 in the document 1112, and the level of the content block 1310-14 is a first-level title.
  • the node 1620-6 in Figure 1JA can, for example, correspond to the new node inserted
  • the content block 1310-14 in Figure 1JB can, for example, correspond to the corresponding content block of the new node. It should be understood that the above-mentioned corresponding relationship is only schematic and does not constitute any limitation to the embodiments of the present disclosure.
  • the user 1102 can sort out the ideas of the document 1112 in the mind map 1610, and the editing operation of the user 1102 is synchronized to the corresponding content in the corresponding content block 1310 of the document 1112, so that the adjustment of the ideas of the document 1112 by the user 1102 in the mind map 1610 is synchronized to other views of the document 1112. Therefore, the efficiency of the user 1102 in editing the document 1112 can be improved, and the user experience can be improved.
  • FIG. 1KA and FIG. 1KB respectively illustrate schematic diagrams of editing the mind map 1610 according to some embodiments of the present disclosure.
  • the user User 1102 deletes node 1620-5 in mind map 1610.
  • electronic device 1110 may delete content block 1310-11 corresponding to node 1620-5 accordingly, as shown in document view 11100B of FIG. 1KB.
  • electronic device 1110 may delete content block 1310-12 associated with content block 1310-11 accordingly.
  • node 1620-5 in FIG. 1KA may, for example, correspond to a deleted node
  • content block 1310-11 in FIG. 1KB may, for example, correspond to a content block of a deleted node. It should be understood that the above correspondence is merely schematic and does not constitute any limitation to the embodiments of the present disclosure.
  • the user 1102 can sort out the ideas of the document 1112 in the mind map 1610, and the editing operation of the user 1102 is synchronized to the corresponding content in the corresponding content block 1310 of the document 1112, so that the adjustment of the ideas of the document 1112 by the user 1102 in the mind map 1610 is synchronized to other views of the document 1112. Therefore, the efficiency of the user 1102 in editing the document 1112 can be improved, and the user experience can be improved.
  • Figures 10A and 10B respectively show schematic diagrams of a document view 11200A and a mind map view 11200B of a document 1112 according to some embodiments of the present disclosure.
  • the exemplary content in the document 1112 of Figures 10A and 10B is different from the content of the document 1112 of Figures 1C to 10B.
  • the document 1112 in FIG10A includes six content blocks 11210-1 to 11210-6, wherein the level of content block 11210-1 is the document title, the level of content block 11210-2 is the fourth-level title, the level of content block 11210-3 is the third-level title, the level of content block 11210-4 is the third-level title, the level of content block 11210-5 is the first-level title, and the level of content block 11210-6 is the second-level title. It can be seen that in the example of FIG10A, the levels of the various content blocks are out of order, for example, the first-level title to the third-level title do not appear before the fourth-level title.
  • the electronic device considers not only the level of the content block but also the position of the content block when determining the hierarchical structure in the mind map.
  • the sub-device traverses each content block in the document 1112 from top to bottom.
  • the electronic device generates a node 11230-1 corresponding to the content block 11210-1 as the root node in the mind map 11220.
  • the electronic device can compare the levels of the content block 11210-2 and the content block 11210-1.
  • the electronic device can set node 11230-2 corresponding to content block 11210-2 as a child node of node 11230-1 corresponding to content block 11210-1, as shown in the mind map 11220 in Figure 1OB.
  • the electronic device can compare the levels of the content blocks 11210-3 and 11210-2 that are consecutive. Since the level of content block 11210-3 is a level three title, and the level of content block 11210-2 is a level four title, the level of content block 11210-3 is higher than the level of content block 11210-2. In response to determining that the level of content block 11210-3 is higher than the level of content block 11210-2, the electronic device can trace back to the parent node of node 11230-2 corresponding to content block 11210-2, that is, node 11230-1.
  • the electronic device may set node 11230-3 corresponding to content block 11210-3 as a child node of node 11230-1 corresponding to content block 11210-1.
  • nodes 11230-2 and 11230-3 corresponding to these two content blocks have the same level, that is, both are child nodes of root node 11230-1.
  • the subordinate relationship between each title can be more directly reflected, avoiding unnecessary level jumps in mind map 11220, thereby improving user experience and improving the efficiency of user 1102 in sorting out ideas.
  • the electronic device continues to traverse, and encounters content block 11210-4 located after content block 11210-3 during the traversal process.
  • the electronic device may compare the content blocks 11210-4 and the level of content block 11210-3. Since the level of content block 11210-4 is a third-level title, and the level of content block 11210-3 is also a third-level title, the level of content block 11210-4 is equal to the level of content block 11210-3.
  • the electronic device can set the node 11230-4 corresponding to content block 11210-4 as a sibling node of node 11230-3 corresponding to content block 11210-3, that is, node 11230-4 is also set as a child node of node 11230-1.
  • the electronic device may determine that the node 11230-5 corresponding to the content block 11210-5 is a child node of the node 11230-1, and the node 1610-12 corresponding to the content block 11210-6 is a child node of the node 11230-5.
  • the corresponding mind map can be efficiently generated when the title hierarchy is out of order, and compared with the existing directory structure, the direct subordinate relationship of each title can be more directly reflected, avoiding unnecessary level jumps in the mind map, thereby improving the user experience and improving the efficiency of users in sorting out their ideas.
  • a blank document 1112 can also be converted to a mind map view.
  • the root node inserted by the user 1102 corresponds to a content block with a document title level
  • the first-level node inserted by the user 1102 corresponds to a content block with a first-level title level
  • the second-level node inserted by the user 1102 corresponds to a content block with a second-level title level, and so on.
  • FIG. 1P shows a block diagram of an example apparatus 11300 for presenting a document according to some embodiments of the present disclosure.
  • the apparatus 11300 may be used, for example, to implement the electronic device shown in FIG. 1A.
  • the apparatus 11300 may include an original rendering module 11302.
  • the original rendering module 11302 is configured to: present a first view of a document, the document including at least one content block, and the at least one content block has a rendering attribute.
  • the apparatus 11300 may also include an adjustment module 11304, which is configured to adjust the rendering attribute of the at least one content block in response to receiving an indication for presenting a second view of the document.
  • the apparatus 11300 may also include a target rendering module 11306, which is configured to present the at least one content block in the second view based on the adjusted rendering attribute.
  • the adjustment module 11304 includes: a type determination module configured to determine the type of the second view based on the indication; and a property adjustment module configured to adjust the presentation property based on the type of the second view.
  • the property adjustment module includes a display adjustment module, which is configured to adjust at least any of the following in response to determining that the type of the second view includes a presentation type: the position of at least one content block in the second view; the size of at least one content block in the second view; the displayed content of at least one content block in the second view; and the combined layout of at least one content block.
  • device 11300 also includes at least one of the following: a paging adjustment module, configured to adjust the paging of the second view in response to receiving an adjustment to the paging control element presented in the second view; a visibility adjustment module, configured to adjust the visibility of at least one content block in response to receiving an adjustment to the visibility control element presented in the second view; a comment adjustment module, configured to adjust the comment for at least one content block in response to receiving an adjustment to the comment control element presented in the second view; and a color adjustment module, configured to adjust the color of at least one content block in response to receiving an adjustment to the color control element presented in the second view.
  • a paging adjustment module configured to adjust the paging of the second view in response to receiving an adjustment to the paging control element presented in the second view
  • a visibility adjustment module configured to adjust the visibility of at least one content block in response to receiving an adjustment to the visibility control element presented in the second view
  • a comment adjustment module configured to adjust the comment for at least one content block in response to receiving an adjustment to the comment control element
  • the property adjustment module includes: a hierarchy determination module, configured to determine the title hierarchy of at least one content block in the first view in response to determining that the type of the second view includes a mind map type; and a mind map presentation module, configured to adjust the presentation properties of at least one content block based on the title hierarchy, and display the at least one content block with the presentation properties in the mind map view.
  • the modules and/or units included in the device 11300 may be implemented in various ways. Including software, hardware, firmware or any combination thereof. In some embodiments, one or more units may be implemented using software and/or firmware, such as machine executable instructions stored on a storage medium. In addition to or as an alternative to machine executable instructions, some or all of the units in device 11300 may be implemented at least in part by one or more hardware logic components. As an example and not limitation, exemplary types of hardware logic components that may be used include field programmable gate arrays (FPGAs), application specific integrated circuits (ASICs), application specific standard products (ASSPs), systems on chip (SOCs), complex programmable logic devices (CPLDs), and the like.
  • FPGAs field programmable gate arrays
  • ASICs application specific integrated circuits
  • ASSPs application specific standard products
  • SOCs systems on chip
  • CPLDs complex programmable logic devices
  • the modules and/or units shown in Figure 1P may be partially or completely implemented as hardware modules, software modules, firmware modules, or any combination thereof.
  • the processes, methods, or procedures described above may be implemented by hardware in a storage system or a host corresponding to the storage system or other computing devices independent of the storage system.
  • document presentation is spread across all aspects of people's lives, work, and social life, such as conference reports, corporate publicity, product promotion, and event presentations.
  • the document to be presented often has some input or inserted content, which can supplement the content of the document.
  • a conventional presentation scheme for the input content is that the user clicks on the input content, and in response to the user's click, jumps to another application page corresponding to the input content to open the input content for presentation. For example, in response to a user clicking on an inserted web link, jumps to a web browser to open the web page and present the content of the web page.
  • This conventional input content presentation scheme will generate many jumps during the document presentation process.
  • the jump presentation path and the presentation boundary are very strong, and the jumps and switches back and forth will destroy the audience's immersive experience of the content. Therefore, it is hoped that the jumps during the document presentation process can be avoided to improve the user experience.
  • some input content may be deeply read during the presentation. How to resolve the conflict between the degree of penetration of deep reading of content and the aesthetics of typesetting during presentation is also a problem worthy of attention.
  • an improved document presentation solution is proposed.
  • a view of content items input in a document is presented in a presentation page of the document.
  • the input content item is presented in the presentation page without jumping to the application page corresponding to the content item.
  • the solution can support presenting the content item in the presentation page by detecting a trigger indication of the view of the input content item. In this way, it is possible to avoid jumping to a page corresponding to the content item outside the presentation page to display the content item. In this way, the user can directly view the content item by triggering the view of the input content item without jumping, thereby improving the user experience of document presentation.
  • FIG. 2A shows a schematic diagram of an example environment 2100 in which embodiments of the present disclosure can be implemented.
  • an electronic device 2110 can present a document 2112 to present a presentation page 2120 of the document 2112.
  • the document 2112 can be any document format suitable for presentation, such as a word document, a ppt document, a pdf document, etc.
  • the presentation page 2120 presents a view 2124 (hereinafter referred to as view 2124) of the content item input or inserted in the document 2112, and may also include other content in the document 2112.
  • the presentation page 2120 may be provided by, for example, a document editing application or a document presentation application in the electronic device 2110.
  • the presentation page 2120 may have a display area suitable for the display area size of the electronic device 2110, or may have other appropriate predetermined or user-specified display area areas.
  • the user 2102 can interact with the electronic device 2110 to select or modify the content presented in the presentation page 2120.
  • the user 2102 can input a trigger indication to the view 124 so that the content of the input or inserted content item associated with the view 2124 is presented in the presentation page 2120.
  • the input content item can be an inserted file or an inserted file link, for example, the input content item can be a picture, a table, a word file, a presentation, a multimedia file (e.g., audio or video), a file link (e.g., an http link or an ftp link), etc.
  • the input content item can be pre-stored in the storage device of the electronic device 2110. Alternatively or additionally, the input content item can also be stored in a network location or a cloud storage device. The embodiments of the present disclosure are not limited in this respect.
  • the electronic device 2110 may be any type of mobile terminal, fixed terminal or portable terminal.
  • the electronic device 2110 may include a mobile phone, a desktop computer, a laptop computer, a notebook computer, a netbook computer, a tablet computer, a media computer, a multimedia tablet, a personal communication system (PCS) device, a personal navigation device, a personal digital assistant (PDA), an audio/video player, a digital camera/camcorder, a positioning device, a television receiver, a radio broadcast receiver, an e-book device, a gaming device, or any combination thereof, including accessories and peripherals of these devices or any combination thereof.
  • the electronic device 2110 may also support any type of interface for the user (such as a "wearable" circuit, etc.).
  • FIG. 2B shows a flow chart of a process 2200 for document presentation according to some embodiments of the present disclosure.
  • the process 2200 may be implemented at an electronic device 2110.
  • the process 2200 will be described with reference to the environment 2100 of FIG. 2A.
  • the switching indication can be, for example, a user 2102 to the page switch control in the edit page, such as a mouse click, a mouse double-click, a mouse box selection, a mouse suspension, a finger or a stylus touch, a finger or a stylus press, and the like.
  • the options menu may include a switching control.
  • electronic device 2110 can detect a switching indication.
  • the switching indication can also be a user 2102 such as voice control.
  • the form of the switching indication adopted herein is not limited in this respect.
  • the electronic device 2110 determines whether a switching indication is received. If the electronic device 2110 does not receive a switching indication at box 2220, the electronic device 2110 continues to detect the switching indication at box 2210. For example, the electronic device 2110 can continuously detect the switching indication in the editing page of the document until the switching indication is detected. Alternatively, the electronic device 2110 can detect the switching indication at predetermined time intervals. In some embodiments, the detection of the switching indication can also be stopped after a period of time. In addition, the detection of the switching indication can also be started by, for example, a user indication.
  • the electronic device 2110 may also detect a switching instruction on the presentation page of the document 2112 to switch to the editing page of the document 2112.
  • a switching instruction on the presentation page of the document 2112 to switch to the editing page of the document 2112.
  • the electronic device 2110 presents the presentation page 2120 of the document 2112 at box 2230.
  • the presentation page 2120 includes a view 2124 of the content item entered in the document 2112.
  • the presentation page 2120 may also include other content in the document 2112.
  • the electronic device 2110 may present the presentation page 2120 to demonstrate the document 2112 in response to the presentation indication of the user 2102 to the document 2112.
  • the view 2124 of the content item can have a variety of different forms. The different types of views 2124 will be further described below in conjunction with Figures 2EA to 2EF.
  • the electronic device 2110 detects a trigger indication for the view 2124.
  • the trigger indication may be, for example, a click of the mouse, a double click of the mouse, a selection of the mouse, a hover of the mouse, a touch of a finger or a stylus, a press of a finger or a stylus, etc. by the user 2102 on the view 2124.
  • the form of the trigger indication used herein is not limited in this respect.
  • the electronic device 2110 determines whether a trigger indication for view 2124 is detected. If the electronic device 2110 does not detect a trigger indication for view 2124 at box 2250, the electronic device 2110 continues to detect a trigger indication for view 2124 at box 2240. For example, the electronic device 2110 may continuously detect a trigger indication for view 2124 until a trigger indication is detected. Alternatively, the electronic device 2110 may detect a trigger indication for view 2124 at predetermined time intervals until a trigger indication is detected. In some embodiments, the detection of the trigger indication for view 2124 may also be stopped after a period of time. In addition, the detection of the trigger indication for view 2124 may also be initiated by, for example, a user indication.
  • the electronic device 2110 If the electronic device detects a trigger indication for view 2124 at box 2250, the electronic device 2110 presents the content item within presentation page 2120 at box 2260. For example, the electronic device 2110 may not need to jump to a page outside presentation page 2120 corresponding to the content item.
  • the electronic device 2110 may present the content item in a browsing window of the presentation page 2120.
  • the browsing window may include a pop-up window.
  • the electronic device 2110 may call the application framework of the document 2112.
  • the electronic device 2110 may construct a browsing window in the presentation page 2120 of the document 2112, and present the content items in the browsing window.
  • the electronic device 2110 may construct a browsing window on the client to present the content items.
  • the electronic device 2110 may call the page framework of the presentation page 2120 that carries the document 2112.
  • the electronic device 2110 may construct a browsing window in the presentation page 2120 of the document 2112, and present the content items in the browsing window. For example, in an example where the input content is a web page, the electronic device 2110 may construct a browsing window through the web page to present the content items.
  • FIG. 2C shows a schematic diagram of an example of presenting content items in a browsing window according to some embodiments of the present disclosure.
  • the browsing window 2310 is a pop-up window.
  • the input content corresponding to the view 2124 or the content of the inserted content item is presented in the browsing window 2310.
  • the browsing window is at least partially covered on the presentation interface 2120.
  • the presentation page 2120 presents the view 2124 in the document 2112 and possible partial content (not shown).
  • specific text is presented in the figure, but such text does not constitute any limitation to the embodiments of the present disclosure.
  • the electronic device 2110 may also detect a closing instruction of the browsing window 2310. For example, the electronic device 2110 may detect a triggering instruction to close the control 2312. If a triggering instruction to close the control 2312 is detected, it means that a closing instruction to the browsing window 2310 is detected. In this case, the electronic device 2110 will close the browsing window 2310. In addition, the electronic device 2110 will return to the presentation of the demonstration page 2120, such as the demonstration page 2120 presented in Figures 2EA to 2EF below.
  • the size, shape and position of the close control 2312 shown in FIG. 2C are merely exemplary and not restrictive.
  • the close control 2312 may have other shapes and sizes and may be located at other locations of the browsing window 2310. Additionally or alternatively, the close control 2312 may be hideable, and when the user 2102, for example, moves the mouse to the position of the close control 2312, the close control 2312 may change from a hidden state to a visible state.
  • the browsing window 2310 can also be semi-transparent.
  • the electronic device 2110 can receive a user instruction to modify the transparency of the browsing window 2310.
  • the browsing window 2310 is a pop-up window in the example of Figure 2C
  • the browsing window can also be a window of other forms, such as a window that can be expanded and contracted, or a window with a fixed position in the presentation page 2120, etc.
  • the browsing window can be at the position where the view 2124 is located in the presentation page 2120.
  • the input content item associated with the view 2124 can be presented at the position of the view 2124.
  • the user 2102 may also interact with the electronic device 2110 to perform operations such as page turning and scrolling on the content presented in the browsing window 2310.
  • operations such as page turning and scrolling on the content presented in the browsing window 2310.
  • FIG. 2DA shows a schematic diagram of an interactive example for a presentation page according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • the browsing window 2310 includes a scroll bar control 2410.
  • the electronic device 2110 is configured to scroll and present content items in response to detecting a scroll operation for the scroll bar control 2410. For example, if the scroll bar control 2410 is scrolled up, the content presented in the browsing window 2310 will scroll up until the scroll bar control 2410 is stopped or the scroll bar control 2410 reaches the top position. Conversely, if the scroll bar control 2410 is scrolled down, the content presented in the browsing window 2310 will scroll down until the scroll bar control 2410 is stopped or the scroll bar control 2410 reaches the bottom position.
  • the scroll bar control 2410 shown in FIG. 2DA is merely exemplary and not restrictive. In some embodiments, the scroll bar control 2410 may have other shapes, sizes or positions. This type of embodiment utilizing the scroll bar control of FIG. 2DA is applicable to content items such as input of long document types. In this way, the content to be presented in the browsing window in the content item can be positioned quickly and conveniently.
  • the electronic device 2110 may further remove the presentation of the first content page of the content item from the browsing window 2310 in response to detecting a page turning indication while the first content page of the content item is presented in the browsing window 2310, and present a second content page of the content item in the browsing window 2310.
  • the second content page may be a content page before or after the first content page.
  • Fig. 2DB shows the schematic diagram of the page turning interaction example for demonstration page according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • the upper page turning control 2420 and the lower page turning control 2430 are shown in the browsing window 2310. If the electronic device 2110 detects that the upper page turning control 2420 is triggered, the electronic device 2110 removes the current content page from the browsing window 2310, and presents the previous content page (if any) of the current content page. If the electronic device 2110 detects that the lower page turning control 2430 is triggered, the electronic device 2110 removes the current content page from the browsing window 2310, and presents the next content page (if any) of the current content page.
  • page-turning control 2420 and page-turning control 2430 can be hidden controls not shown.
  • page-turning control 2420 When user 2102 clicks or touches browse window 2310 such as the lower left corner position, then page-turning control 2420 is triggered.
  • page-turning control 2430 When user 2102 clicks or touches browse window 2310 such as the lower right corner position, then page-turning control 2430 is triggered.
  • the upper and lower page-turning controls also can be arranged in other positions in browse window 2310, and can have other size and shape.
  • This type of embodiment that can turn pages to content items of Fig. 2CB presents is applicable to the content items of input or insertion of for example paging display, such as the document of presentation type.In this way, can quickly and easily locate the content to be presented in browse window in the content items.
  • the input content items may include playable multimedia content, such as audio files, video files, and the like.
  • the electronic device 2110 may play the multimedia content in the presentation page 2120.
  • the electronic device 2110 may play the multimedia content in a location such as a pop-up window or a view occupying a larger area.
  • the electronic device 2110 may respond to the interaction instructions of the user 2102, such as playback positioning, acceleration, deceleration of the multimedia content, etc., to adjust the playback of the multimedia content. Take control.
  • the content items input or inserted in the document 2112 can be opened and interacted during the presentation process. In this way, the user experience of the document presentation can be further improved.
  • the presentation page 2120 of the document 2112 is a page for displaying the content items of the document 2112.
  • the electronic device 2110 may receive a display instruction for the content entered in the editing page of the document. Additionally or alternatively, the electronic device 2110 may also refuse to receive an editing instruction for the content entered in the editing page. In this way, it is possible to prevent the content entered in the editing page of the document from being mistakenly edited or modified by the user in the presentation page.
  • view 2124 can have various different types, and user 2102 can select a view of the content item as needed. For example, in the editing page of document 2112, user 2102 can select the type of view 2124.
  • Electronic device 2110 can detect the view type selected by user 2102 to enter a view 2124 of that type in document 2112.
  • Figures 2EA to 2EF show schematic diagrams of examples of presentation pages 2120 for document presentation according to some embodiments of the present disclosure, in which views 2124 may have different forms.
  • presentation page 2120 presents view 2124 and part of the content in document 2112.
  • the content of document 2112 presented includes a paragraph of text 2512 and view 2124.
  • the paragraph of text 2512 may be the content itself in document 2112, rather than an input content item.
  • a specific paragraph of text is presented in the figure, but such text does not constitute any limitation to the embodiments of the present disclosure.
  • the presentation page 2120 may also be configured to There are controls such as scroll bar controls and/or page turning controls for navigating and locating the content of the presented document 2112.
  • a close control may also be provided in the presentation page 2120 to close the current presentation page 2120.
  • the input content item of the document 2112 is a picture named "20220603.png".
  • the view 2124 belongs to the first view that presents the first information associated with the content item, and the first view occupies the first area in the document 2112. That is, the first view occupies the first area in the presentation page 2120.
  • the first information includes the file name 2524 of the content item.
  • the first information may also include a category diagram 2522 of the file category of the content item.
  • the category diagram 2522 indicates that the content item belongs to the picture category.
  • view 2124 belongs to a second view that presents second information associated with a content item.
  • the second view occupies a second area in document 2112. That is, the second view occupies a second area in presentation page 2120.
  • the second area may be greater than the first area occupied by the first view.
  • the second information includes a file name 2534 of the content item and auxiliary information of the content item, such as file size, etc.
  • the second information may also include a category diagram 2532 of a file category of the content item.
  • the second information may also include a second view editing indicator 2536.
  • User 2102 may edit the second view by triggering the second view editing indicator 2536. The editing process of the second view will be described in detail below in conjunction with FIG. 2G.
  • view 2124 belongs to a third view that presents third information associated with a content item.
  • the third view occupies a third area in document 2112. That is, the third view occupies a third area in presentation page 2120.
  • the third area may be larger than the second area occupied by the second view.
  • the third information may include a thumbnail or preview 2542 of the content item, or include the content item itself.
  • the third information may also include a file name 2544 of the input content item.
  • a third view edit indicator (not shown) may also be included in the third view.
  • the input content item of document 2112 is a presentation named "presentation.ppt”.
  • view 2124 pertains to presenting first information associated with a content item.
  • a first view which occupies a first area in the document 2112.
  • the first information includes a file name 2554 of the content item, i.e., "Presentation.ppt".
  • the first information may also include a category diagram 2552 of the file category of the content item.
  • the category diagram 2552 indicates that the content item belongs to the presentation (i.e., ppt) category.
  • view 2124 belongs to a second view that presents second information associated with a content item.
  • the second view occupies a second area in document 2112.
  • the second area may be larger than the first area occupied by the first view.
  • the second information includes a file name 2564 of the content item and auxiliary information of the content item, such as file size.
  • the second information may also include a category diagram 2562 of a file category of the content item.
  • the second information may also include a second view edit indicator 2566.
  • User 2102 may edit the second view by triggering the second view edit indicator 2566. The editing process of the second view will be described in detail below in conjunction with FIG. 2G .
  • view 2124 belongs to a third view that presents third information associated with a content item.
  • the third view occupies a third area in document 2112.
  • the third area may be larger than the second area occupied by the second view.
  • the third information may include home page content 2572 of the content item.
  • the third information may also include a file name 2574 of the input content item.
  • an optional third view edit indicator may also be included in the third view.
  • the content item associated with the view 2124 may be presented at the location of the view 2124 in the presentation page 2120.
  • the browsing window for the content item may be at the location of the third view in the presentation page 2120.
  • the input or content item associated with the view 2124 may be presented at the location of the third view.
  • the multimedia content may be played at the location of the third view.
  • the presentation page 2120 of the document 2112 and various views 2124 of the input content items are described in conjunction with FIGS. 2EA to 2EF, taking the input content items of the picture type and the presentation type as examples. It should be understood that these examples of the presentation page 2120 and the views 2124 are merely exemplary and not restrictive.
  • the presentation page 2120 may have a shape different from that shown in FIGS. 2EA to 2EF, for example, the presentation page 2120 may be The presentation page 2120 may be square or circular, etc.
  • the presentation page 2120 may also be of different sizes, such as 13 inches, 14 inches, 3.5 inches, etc.
  • the view 2124 may belong to the first view, the second view, the third view, or other appropriate view types described in detail above. In addition to the information listed above, the various views may also show other information, or show less information. The scope of the present disclosure is not limited in this respect.
  • FIG. 2FA shows a schematic diagram of an interactive example of a view 2124 for editing a content item according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • the edit toolbar 2610 can be displayed, for example, in the form of a floating toolbar.
  • the various icons in the edit toolbar 2610 correspond to different editing operations.
  • icon 2612 represents a zoom operation
  • icon 2614 represents a storage operation
  • icon 2616 represents adding a view 2124 of the first view
  • icon 2618 represents adding a view 2124 of the second view
  • icon 2622 represents adding a view 2124 of the third view
  • icon 2624 represents the operation of adding an annotation, and so on.
  • FIG. 2DA it is indicated by shading that icon 2616 is selected, that is, the view 2124 of the first view is added.
  • the electronic device 2110 may detect a view switching indication for the content item.
  • the view switching indication is used to indicate that the view 2124 is switched to another view.
  • the electronic device 2110 may switch the view 2124 to another view in the document 2112.
  • FIG. 2FB shows a schematic diagram of another interactive example of a view 2124 for editing a content item according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • a switching toolbar 2630 of the view 2124 may be displayed, for example, in the form of a floating toolbar.
  • Each icon in the switching toolbar 2630 corresponds to a different view type.
  • Icon 2632 indicates that the view 2124 is switched to the first view
  • icon 2634 indicates that the view 2124 is switched to the second view
  • icon 2636 indicates that the view 2124 is switched to the third view.
  • the icon 2634 is indicated by shading as being selected, and in this example, the electronic device 2110 is about to switch the view 2124 to the second view.
  • FIG. 2FC shows a view 2124 for editing a content item according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • electronic device 2110 switches view 2124 to view 2124 in FIG2FC.
  • View 2124 in FIG2FC occupies a larger area than FIG2FB and presents more information.
  • the electronic device 2110 may detect a trigger for a view 2124 of a content item in the edit page 2600 of the document 2112. If the electronic device 2110 detects a trigger for a view 2124 of a content item in the edit page 2600, the electronic device 2110 may jump to a page outside the edit page 2600 to display the content item. For example, the electronic device 2110 may jump to the presentation page 2120 to display the content item.
  • a switching indication control is further provided in the editing page 2600. As described above, the user 2102 can switch from the editing page 2600 to the presentation page 2120 by triggering the switching indication control.
  • the electronic device 2110 may further edit the view 2124, such as editing the layout of the view 2124.
  • the electronic device 2110 may detect a view edit indication for a content item, which is used to indicate a modification to the layout of the view 2124. The electronic device 2110 may then modify the layout of the view 2124 based on the view edit indication.
  • FIG. 2G shows a schematic diagram of another example of interaction for editing a view of a content item according to some embodiments of the present disclosure.
  • the second view editing window 2730 may be displayed in the presentation page 2120.
  • the second view editing window 2730 may include a view mode selection icon (also called a card mode selection icon) and a view background selection icon (also called a card background selection icon).
  • a view mode selection icon also called a card mode selection icon
  • a view background selection icon also called a card background selection icon
  • the view background selection icon can be used to select the background of view 2124. For example, when icon 2742 is selected, the background of view 2124 is white. If icon 2744, icon 2746, and icon 2748 are selected, the background of view 2124 is adjusted to the pattern displayed by the corresponding icon, respectively. It should be understood that the view background selection icon described above is merely exemplary, and more icons can be used to represent different background colors, background patterns, and so on of view 2124.
  • the layout of view 2124 can be modified to any appropriate layout and form. The scope of the present disclosure is not limited in this respect.
  • the above takes the view 2124 of the second view as an example to illustrate editing the second view by triggering the second view editing indicator 2722. It should be understood that the third view can also be edited in a similar manner.
  • the user can select and edit the view of the input content item.
  • the user can select different display methods of the view of the content item according to the needs.
  • it can adapt to different typesetting layouts and repeated reading scenarios. For example, for important input content, a third view with a larger area can be used.
  • the first view or the second view with a smaller area can be used. In this way, when typeset documents, users can have more choices for view style and layout based on content priority.
  • FIG. 1 shows an example process for document presentation according to some embodiments of the present disclosure in conjunction with Figures 2B to 2G.
  • Figure 2H shows a flowchart of another process 2800 for document presentation according to some embodiments of the present disclosure.
  • Process 2800 can be implemented at electronic device 2110.
  • process 2800 will be described with reference to environment 2100 of Figure 2A.
  • electronic device 2110 detects a trigger indication of view 2124 of content items in document 2112.
  • the trigger indication may be, for example, a mouse click, a mouse double-click, a mouse selection, a mouse hover, a finger or a stylus touch, a finger or a stylus press, etc. by user 2102 on the view 2124.
  • the trigger indication may also be other methods such as a voice trigger indication.
  • the form of the trigger indication used herein is not limited in this respect.
  • the electronic device 2110 determines whether a trigger indication is received or detected. In some embodiments, if the electronic device 2110 does not receive a trigger indication at block 2820, the electronic device 2110 may continue to detect a trigger indication at block 2810. If the electronic device 2110 receives a trigger indication at block 2820, the electronic device 2110 determines the current page type of the document 2112 at block 2830.
  • electronic device 2110 determines whether the current page type of document 2112 is an edit page or a presentation page.
  • the edit page may be edit page 2600 or other appropriate edit pages.
  • the presentation page may be presentation page 2120 or other appropriate presentation pages.
  • the electronic device 2110 determines that the page type is the edit page 2600, the electronic device 2110 jumps to a page other than the edit page 2600 to present the content item at box 2850. For example, the electronic device 2110 may jump to the presentation page 2120 or other appropriate page to present the content item.
  • the electronic device 2110 determines that the page type is a presentation page 2120, the electronic device 2110 presents the content item in the presentation page 2120 at block 2860.
  • the electronic device 2110 may present the content item in the presentation page 2120 without jumping to a page corresponding to the content item outside the presentation page 2120.
  • the electronic device 2110 may present the content item in a browsing window of the presentation page 2120.
  • the browsing window may include a pop-up window.
  • the electronic device 2110 may call the application framework of the document 2112.
  • the electronic device 2110 may build a browsing window in the presentation page 2120 of the document 2112, and present the content item in the browsing window.
  • the electronic device 2110 may call the page framework of the presentation page 2120 hosting the document 2112.
  • the electronic device 2110 may build a browsing window in the presentation page 2120 of the document 2112, and present the content item in the browsing window.
  • the electronic device 2110 presents several examples of content items within the presentation page 2120 and Various interaction examples in the demonstration page 2120 have been described in detail in the above text in conjunction with FIG. 2C and FIG. 2EA to FIG. 2EF. The above examples can all be incorporated into the process 2800. No further description will be given here.
  • the electronic device 2110 may also receive a switching indication in the edit page 2600 of the document 2112.
  • the electronic device 2110 may present the presentation page 2120 of the document 2112 in response to the switching indication.
  • the presentation page 2120 includes a view 2124 of the content item entered in the edit page 2600 of the document 2112.
  • the electronic device 2110 may present the content item in the presentation page 2120.
  • the above process may be similar to the boxes 2210 to 2230 in the process 2200. No further description is given here.
  • the electronic device 2110 may also perform the processes of the boxes 2240 to 2260 in the process 2200 and any other additional processes. Examples of these processes may be similar to the several examples described in conjunction with the accompanying drawings in FIG. 2B above, and are not described in detail here.
  • the electronic device 2110 may also detect a view switching indication for the content item.
  • the view switching indication is used to indicate that the view is switched to another view. If the electronic device 2110 detects the view switching indication, the electronic device 2110 may switch the view to another view in the document.
  • the above view switching process is similar to the process described above in conjunction with Figures 2FA to 2FC, and will not be repeated here.
  • the electronic device 2110 may also detect a view editing indication for a content item.
  • the view editing indication is used to indicate a modification to the layout of the view. If the electronic device 2110 detects the view editing indication, the electronic device 2110 may modify the layout of the view based on the view editing indication.
  • the above-mentioned view layout modification process is similar to the process described above in conjunction with FIG. 2G, and will not be described in detail here.
  • the electronic device 2110 may receive an instruction to edit the content in the document 2112.
  • the electronic device 2110 may edit the content according to the edit instruction.
  • the electronic device 2120 may receive an instruction to display the content entered under the edit page 2600.
  • the electronic device 2120 may refuse to receive an instruction to edit the content.
  • different pages can be set for the document to perform different operations. For example, by editing the content of the document only on the editing page, but not on the presentation page, it is possible to avoid modifying the document content due to the user's erroneous operation during the document presentation process. For another example, by presenting the content of the document on the presentation page, it is possible to avoid jumping to a page outside the presentation page that corresponds to the content to display the content. In this way, page jumps during the presentation of the document content can be avoided, thereby improving the user experience of the document presentation.
  • FIG. 2I shows a schematic structural block diagram of an apparatus 2900 for document presentation according to some embodiments of the present disclosure.
  • the apparatus 2900 may be implemented as or included in an electronic device 2110.
  • Each module/component in the apparatus 2900 may be implemented by hardware, software, firmware, or any combination thereof.
  • the device 2900 includes a presentation page presentation module 2910, which is configured to present a presentation page 2120 of the document 2112 in response to receiving a switching indication in the editing page of the document 2112.
  • the presentation page 2120 includes a view 2124 of the content item input in the document 2112.
  • the device 2900 also includes a content item presentation module 2920, which is configured to present the content item in the presentation page 2120 in response to detecting a trigger indication for the view 2124. For example, there is no need to jump to a page corresponding to the content item outside the presentation page.
  • the content item presentation module 2920 includes a browsing window module, which is configured to call the application framework of the document 2112, build a browsing window in the presentation page 2120 of the document 2112, and present the content item in the browsing window.
  • the browsing window module is further configured to call the page framework of the presentation page carrying the document 2112, build a browsing window in the presentation page 2120 of the document 2112, and present the content item in the browsing window.
  • the device 2900 further includes a browsing window closing module, which is configured to close the browsing window in response to detecting a closing instruction for the browsing window.
  • the browsing window module is configured to, in response to detecting a page turn indication while a first content page of a content item is presented in the browsing window, remove presentation of the first content page from the browsing window; and present a second content page of the content item in the browsing window.
  • the browsing window module further comprises a scroll bar control.
  • the browsing window module is further configured to: scroll and present the content items in response to detecting a scroll operation on the scroll bar control.
  • the view of the inserted content item is one of the following views: a first view presenting first information associated with the content item, the first view occupying a first area in document 2112; a second view presenting second information associated with the content item, the second view occupying a second area in document 2112 that exceeds the first area; a third view presenting third information associated with the content item, the third view occupying a third area in document 2112 that exceeds the second area.
  • the view 2124 includes a third view
  • the content item presentation module 2920 is configured to present the content item at the location of the third view in the presentation page 2120 .
  • the inserted content item includes playable multimedia content, such as audio or video, etc.
  • the content item presentation module 2920 is configured to play the multimedia content.
  • the device 2900 further includes a view switching indication detection module configured to detect a view switching indication for a content item in an editing page of the document 2112.
  • the view switching indication is used to indicate switching the view 2124 to another view.
  • the device 2900 further includes a view switching module configured to switch the view to another view in the document 2112 in response to detecting the view switching indication.
  • the device 2900 further includes a view editing indication detection module configured to detect a view editing indication for a content item in an editing page of the document 2112.
  • the view editing indication is used to indicate a modification to the layout of the view 2124.
  • the device 2900 further includes a view layout modification module configured to modify the layout of the view 2124 based on the view editing indication.
  • the device 2900 further includes an instruction receiving module configured to receive, in the presentation page 2120 of the document 2112, an instruction to display the content input in the editing page. and refusing to receive editorial instructions regarding the Content.
  • the device 2900 also includes a page jump module configured to jump to a page outside the editing page to display the content item in response to triggering a view of the content item in the editing page of the document 2112.
  • FIG. 2J shows a schematic structural block diagram of an apparatus 21000 for document presentation according to some embodiments of the present disclosure.
  • the apparatus 21000 may be implemented as or included in an electronic device 2110.
  • Each module/component in the apparatus 21000 may be implemented by hardware, software, firmware, or any combination thereof.
  • the device 21000 includes a page type determination module 21010, which is configured to determine the current page type of the document 2112 in response to receiving a trigger indication of a view 2124 of a content item in the document 2112.
  • the device 21000 also includes a page jump module 21020, which is configured to jump to a page other than the edit page to present the content item in response to the page type being the edit page.
  • the device 21000 also includes a presentation page presentation module 21030, which is configured to present the content item in the presentation page 2120 in response to the page type being the presentation page 2120.
  • the device 21000 further includes a switching module configured to present a presentation page 2120 of the document 2112 in response to receiving a switching indication in the editing page of the document 2112.
  • the presentation page 2120 may include a view 2124 of the content item entered in the editing page of the document 2112.
  • the device 21000 may further include a content item presentation module configured to present the content item in the presentation page 2120 in response to detecting a trigger indication of the view 2124.
  • the content item presentation module is configured to call the application framework of the document 2112, build a browsing window in the presentation page 2120 of the document 2112, and present the content item in the browsing window.
  • the content item presentation module may be configured to call the page framework of the presentation page 2120 carrying the document 2112, build a browsing window in the presentation page 2120 of the document 2112, and present the content item in the browsing window.
  • the apparatus 21000 further comprises a browsing window closing module, the browsing window closing module being configured to close the browsing window in response to detecting a closing instruction for the browsing window.
  • the browsing window module is configured to move the first content page of the content item from the browsing window to the next page in response to detecting a page turning instruction while the first content page of the content item is presented in the browsing window.
  • the browsing window module further comprises a scroll bar control. In this example, the browsing window module is further configured to scroll the content items in response to detecting a scroll operation on the scroll bar control.
  • view 2124 belongs to one of the following views: a first view presenting first information associated with a content item, the first view occupying a first area in document 2112; a second view presenting second information associated with the content item, the second view occupying a second area in document 2112 exceeding the first area; a third view presenting third information associated with the content item, the third view occupying a third area in document 2112 exceeding the second area.
  • view 2124 may include the third view, and the content item presentation module is configured to present the content item at the location of the third view in presentation page 2120.
  • the inserted content item includes playable multimedia content, such as audio or video, etc. In such an embodiment, the content item presentation module is configured to play the multimedia content.
  • the device 21000 further includes a view switching indication detection module configured to detect a view switching indication for a content item in an editing page of the document 2112.
  • the view switching indication is used to indicate switching the view 2124 to another view.
  • the device 21000 further includes a view switching module configured to switch the view to another view in the document 2112 in response to detecting the view switching indication.
  • the device 21000 further includes a view editing indication detection module configured to detect a view editing indication for a content item in an editing page of the document 2112.
  • the view editing indication is used to indicate a modification to the layout of the view 2124.
  • the device 21000 further includes a view layout modification module configured to modify the layout of the view 2124 based on the view editing indication.
  • the device 21000 further includes an instruction receiving module configured to receive, in the presentation page 2120 of the document 2112, a display instruction for the content input in the editing page, and to refuse to receive an editing instruction for the content.
  • the device 21000 further includes a page jump module configured to, in response to triggering a view of a content item in an editing page of the document 2112 , jump to a page outside the editing page to display the content item.
  • a page jump module configured to, in response to triggering a view of a content item in an editing page of the document 2112 , jump to a page outside the editing page to display the content item.
  • a presenter can present a document to an audience through a conference interface in an online meeting, or may present a document to an audience through a presentation device in a live meeting.
  • the audience can only passively view the document content controlled and displayed by the presenter during the presentation. The audience cannot interact with the document during or after the presentation. It is expected to provide more flexible interaction with the presented document.
  • a document interaction solution is proposed to support interaction during document presentation.
  • the access path information of the document is presented, so that other terminal devices can access the document based on the access path information.
  • other terminal devices After accessing the document, other terminal devices present the presentation view of the document in presentation mode.
  • the flexible access and interaction capabilities of users with the presented document in presentation mode are enhanced, thereby improving the user experience.
  • FIG. 3A shows a schematic diagram of an example environment 3100 in which embodiments of the present disclosure can be implemented.
  • a terminal device 3110 is a device for document presentation.
  • a user 3102 can present a view 3112 of a document 3105 by operating the terminal device 3110 .
  • Document 3105 can be any document format suitable for presentation, such as a text document (e.g., a word document), a presentation document (e.g., a PPT document), a PDF document, etc.
  • document 3105 can be an online document, such as being stored in an online document library 3140.
  • Management device 3130 can be used to manage and maintain online documents.
  • Terminal device 3110 can have management rights to document 3105, including various rights such as access, editing, collaboration, and sharing.
  • terminal device 3110 is installed with a corresponding application, and a logged-in user of the application (e.g., user 3102) can be assigned management rights to document 3105.
  • Terminal device 3110 can communicate with management device 3130 and document library 3140 via network 3150.
  • terminal devices 3120-1, 3120-2, ... 3120-N for the convenience of discussion, collectively or individually referred to as terminal devices 3120, where N is an integer greater than or equal to 1).
  • These terminal devices 3120 can be operated by users 3104-1, 3104-2, ... 3104-N (for the convenience of discussion, collectively or individually referred to as users 3104).
  • the terminal device 3120 can also communicate with the terminal device 3110 and/or the management device 3130 through the network 3150.
  • the terminal device 3120 can access the document 3105 with the permission of the terminal device 3110.
  • the terminal devices 3120-1, 3120-2, ... 3120-N can respectively present views 3122-1, 3122-2, ... 3122-N (for ease of discussion, collectively or individually referred to as views 3122) of the document 3105.
  • the terminal device 3120 can also be installed with a corresponding application, and the logged-in user of the application (e.g., user 3104) can have the interaction permission for the document 3105 if allowed.
  • user 3102 may operate terminal device 3110 to present document 3105 in a live meeting, or may present document 3105 in an online meeting with one or more users 3104 .
  • terminal device 3110 is sometimes referred to as a "first terminal device” and terminal device 3120 is sometimes referred to as a "second terminal device.” It should be understood that although terminal device 3110 is shown in FIG. 3A as being used to present document 3105, any terminal device can be used to implement document presentation according to application requirements.
  • terminal device 3110 or 3120 can be any type of mobile terminal, fixed terminal or portable terminal, including mobile phone, desktop computer, laptop computer, notebook computer, netbook computer, tablet computer, media computer, multimedia tablet, personal communication system (PCS) equipment, personal navigation device, personal digital assistant (PDA), audio/video player, digital camera/camcorder, positioning device, television receiver, radio broadcast receiver, electronic book device, game device or any combination of the foregoing, including accessories and peripherals of these devices or any combination thereof.
  • terminal device 3110 can also support any type of interface for user (such as "wearable" circuit, etc.).
  • Management device 3130 can be any type of computing system/server that can provide computing power, including but not limited to computing devices in mainframe, edge computing node, cloud environment, etc.
  • the terminal device 3110 may not communicate with the remote management device 3130.
  • FIG. 3B shows a signaling flow for document interaction according to some embodiments of the present disclosure. 3200.
  • the signaling flow 3200 involves the implementation at the terminal device 3110 and the terminal device 3120.
  • the signaling flow 3200 will be described with reference to the environment 3100 of FIG. 3A, so it is assumed that the terminal device 3110 is a device for presenting a document, and the terminal device 3120 is a device for accessing the presented document.
  • FIG. 3B although only a single terminal device 3120 is shown, it can be understood that multiple terminal devices 3120 can perform similar signaling interactions with the terminal device 3110.
  • the terminal device 3110 presents (3205) the access path information of the document 3105 in the presentation view of the document while the document 3105 is being presented.
  • the terminal device 3110 may present (3202) the presentation view 3112 of the document 3105 in the presentation mode of the document 3105, and determine whether to present the access path information in the presentation view 3112.
  • the presentation view of a document refers to the organization or layout of at least part of the content of the document in a presentation mode.
  • the page view of a document refers to the organization or layout of at least part of the content of the document in a non-presentation mode.
  • the document can be edited, set, and other operations in the page view.
  • the page view is sometimes also referred to as a normal view or a non-presentation view.
  • access path information of document 3105 is presented in presentation view 3112 of document 3105.
  • the document 3105 can be accessed through the access path information.
  • the document 3105 can be an online document and have a corresponding access path.
  • the access path information can be in any form, such as a QR code, an access link, and other information that can be used to access the document.
  • the terminal device 3110 may determine to present the access path information of the document 3105 based on a user request. Specifically, the terminal device 3110 may detect a sharing indication during presentation of the document 3105 to indicate that the document 3105 is to be shared during presentation. If such an indication is detected, the terminal device 3110 will present the access path information of the document 3105 when the document 3105 is presented. In some embodiments, the sharing indication during presentation may be triggered before the document 3105 enters presentation mode, for example, by the user 3102. Additionally or alternatively, the sharing indication during presentation may also be triggered when the document 3105 is in presentation mode. In some embodiments, as an alternative, the access path information of the document may also be presented automatically or by default in the presentation view of the document 3105.
  • Figures 3CA to 3CD show example pages of a document 3105 presented at a terminal device 3110 according to some embodiments of the present disclosure. It should be understood that the pages in Figures 3CA to 3CD and other figures described below are only example pages, and various page designs may actually exist. The various elements in the page may have different arrangements and different visual representations, one or more elements may be omitted or replaced, and one or more other elements may also exist. The embodiments of the present disclosure are not limited in this respect.
  • 3CA shows a page view 3300 of document 3105, where document 3105 has not entered the presentation mode.
  • the document content is presented in page view 3300.
  • some available functions may be presented, including a presentation mode function 3310 for triggering entry into the presentation mode; a display comment function 3312 for displaying some comment information of document 3105 (if any); and more options 3314 for displaying more available functions (if any).
  • the terminal device 3110 can determine that the document 3105 enters the presentation mode and presents the presentation view 3302 as shown in FIG. 3CB.
  • the terminal device 3110 can control the presentation progress of the document 3105 under the operation of the user 3102 to present the content in different positions or areas of the document 3102.
  • some functions that can be triggered in the presentation mode can also be presented.
  • the exit presentation function 3320 can be presented to trigger the exit of the presentation mode of the document 3105; the share document function 3322 to trigger the sharing indication during the presentation; and more options 3314 for displaying more available functions (if any) in the presentation mode.
  • the terminal device 3110 can detect the sharing indication during the presentation.
  • the triggering method of the presentation mode function 3310 can include, for example, a click or touch gesture of an input device (for example, a mouse), the mouse hovering at the location where the function is located, and so on.
  • the access path information 3330 of the document 3102 is presented in the presentation view 3302, as shown in FIG. 3CC.
  • the access path information 3300 is shown in the form of a QR code, although other forms of access path information are also applicable.
  • FIG. 3CB shows the sharing indication when the presentation is triggered in the presentation mode
  • the user may also be allowed to configure or automatically determine the access path information of the document to be presented during the presentation before entering the presentation mode.
  • the terminal device 3120 acquires (3210) the access path information of the document 3105.
  • the terminal device 3120 can access the document 3105 based on the access path information.
  • the terminal device 3120 that performs the access can be any device that can obtain the access path information of the document 3105.
  • the terminal device 3120 may obtain the access path information in various ways. For example, if the terminal device 3120 can scan a QR code or receive an access link under the operation of the user 3104, the document 3105 can be accessed. In some embodiments, the terminal device 3120 can access the online document 3105 through the management device 3130. For example, the terminal device 3120 may be installed with an application capable of accessing the online document 3105, and access the document 3105 through the application.
  • the terminal device 3120 initiates (3215) an access request including the acquired access path information.
  • the access request may be sent directly to the terminal device 3110, or may be sent to the management device 3130 of the document 3105, so that the terminal device 3120 obtains the ability to access the document 3105, depending on the specific management method of the document 3105.
  • the terminal device 3120 provides (3220) a presentation view of the document 3105 to the terminal device 3120.
  • the presentation view of the document may be based on the presentation progress of the document 3105 at the terminal device 3110.
  • the presentation view may be sent directly to the terminal device 3120, or may be sent to the terminal device 3120 via the management device 3130, depending on the specific management method of the document 3105.
  • the terminal device 3120 receives (3225) the presentation view of the document 3105, and presents (3230) the presentation view of the document 3105 in the presentation mode.
  • one or more interactive operations on the document 3105 may be performed at the terminal device 3120.
  • the terminal device 3120 may perform corresponding processing based on the received interactive operations.
  • Terminal device 3120 provides various interactive capabilities supported by document 3105 and/or allowed by the administrator of document 3105 (e.g., user 3102). Such interactive capabilities may include, but are not limited to, follow-up demonstration or free browsing capabilities of documents, comment capabilities, comment browsing capabilities, special identification capabilities, etc.
  • Figures 3DA to 3DH show example pages presented at a terminal device 3120 according to some embodiments of the present disclosure.
  • the terminal device 3120 scans the access path information 3330 in the form of a QR code to obtain access to the document 3105.
  • terminal device 3120 may present a presentation view of document 3105 , the content of which may correspond to the content in the presentation view of document 3105 being presented on terminal device 3110 .
  • the terminal device 3120 can present a presentation view 3402 of the document 3105 in the presentation mode. Initially, the presentation view 3402 presented at the terminal device 3120 can be synchronized to the presentation view 3302 presented at the terminal device 3110.
  • the terminal device 3120 in the presentation mode, free browsing of the document 3105 is not supported at the terminal device 3120. That is, in the presentation mode, the terminal device 3120 presents a presentation view of the document 3105 according to the presentation progress of the document 3105 at the terminal device 3110. The content presented at the terminal device 3120 changes with the presentation operation of the presenter (e.g., user 3102) at the terminal device 3110.
  • the presenter e.g., user 3102
  • the user can be supported to exit the demonstration mode and switch to other views, such as page views, through certain preset interactive instructions.
  • the demonstration exit instruction may include one or more instructions.
  • a specific control may be provided, such as a demonstration exit control, a view switching control, a startup page view control, etc., and a demonstration exit instruction may be initiated by triggering the control to exit the demonstration mode.
  • certain gesture operations, mouse operations or other interactive operations may also be set to trigger the demonstration exit instruction. For example, if an up and down sliding gesture or an up and down sliding of the mouse is detected, it can be determined that the demonstration exit instruction is initiated, thereby exiting the demonstration mode.
  • the document 3105 may be presented in a page view.
  • the page view may support the user's free browsing of the document 3105.
  • the terminal device 3120 will detect the browsing progress of the document 3105 and present the page view of the document based on the detected browsing progress.
  • the user may be allowed to continue to switch back to presentation mode.
  • Terminal device 3120 may detect a presentation follow indication and enter presentation mode after detecting the indication.
  • presentation mode the presentation view of document 3105 may continue to be presented according to the current presentation progress of document 3105 at terminal device 3110.
  • the presentation follow indication may include one or more indications.
  • a specific control may be provided, such as a presentation follow control, and a presentation follow indication may be initiated by triggering the control.
  • a presentation follow indication may also be initiated by a specific gesture operation or other operation.
  • the presentation view of the document 3105 presented at the terminal device 3120 may also include some functions that can be triggered by the terminal device 3120 when accessing the document 3105.
  • the presentation view 3402 may include a presentation follow-up control 3420 for synchronizing with the presentation progress at the terminal device 3110, so that the document content presented at the terminal device 3120 is synchronized to the document content being demonstrated at the terminal device 3110; and a presentation exit control 3422 for exiting the presentation mode so that the user can freely browse the content of the document 3105 without synchronizing to the presentation progress at the terminal device 3110.
  • the presentation view 3402 may also include a display comment control 3424 to display the existing comment information in the document 3105 (if any); and more options 3426 for displaying more available controls (if any). It should be understood that although multiple functions are shown in the figure, one or more of these functions may be omitted, or more other functions may be included.
  • the presentation view presented at the terminal device 3120 may be synchronized to the presentation progress at the terminal device 3110 by default, that is, the content currently being presented by the host or sharer (e.g., user 3102) is presented. If free browsing of the document 3105 is not supported in the presentation mode and the user of the terminal device 3120 expects to browse other contents of the document 3105, the user may interact with the document 3105 to trigger a presentation exit instruction for the document 3105, such as triggering the presentation exit control 3422 of FIG. 3DB.
  • a presentation exit instruction for the document 3105 such as triggering the presentation exit control 3422 of FIG. 3DB.
  • the presentation mode can be exited and the page view of the document 3105 can be presented.
  • the terminal device 3120 can present the browse page of the document 3105 independently of the presentation progress of the document 3105 at the terminal device 3110.
  • the terminal device 3120 can determine the browsing progress of the document 3105 based on the browsing positioning of the document 3105 by the user 3104, such as the browsing positioning indicated by the mouse or trigger gesture, and determine the content to be presented in the page view based on the browsing progress. For example, if the triggering of the presentation exit control 3422 is detected in FIG. 3DB, the page view 3403 shown in FIG. 3DC continues to present other parts of the document according to the user's browsing operation.
  • the user 3104 If the user 3104 expects to continue to follow the presentation progress of the document 3105, the user is also allowed to trigger an interactive operation corresponding to the presentation follow indication for the document 3105, such as triggering the presentation follow control 3420 in FIG. 3DC. If the presentation follow operation is detected, the document 3105 can enter the presentation mode.
  • the terminal device 3120 can present the presentation view of the document 3105 based on the current presentation progress of the document 3105 at the terminal device 3110. In this way, the presentation view presented at the terminal device 3120 is synchronized to the content being presented at the terminal device 3110.
  • the terminal device 3120 can receive presentation location information for the document 3105 from the terminal device 3110 or from the management device 3130 to determine the location in the document 3105 being presented.
  • the user may also be allowed to trigger a demonstration exit instruction or a demonstration follow instruction in other ways.
  • the user may be allowed to indicate that he wants to browse other content besides the demonstration content in the document 3105 by means of an input device or a sliding gesture, or may be allowed to indicate to follow the demonstration of the sharer by setting other icons.
  • the embodiments of the present disclosure are not limited in this respect.
  • the user in demonstration mode, is also supported to browse the document 3105 freely at the terminal device 3120.
  • the browsing at this time will show the demonstration views corresponding to different browsing progress.
  • the terminal device 3120 can detect the browsing progress of the document at the second terminal device, and present the demonstration view of the document based on the detected browsing progress. For example, based on the demonstration view 3402 of Figure 3DB, if the user continues to browse (for example, by scrolling the mouse or sliding gestures, etc.), the terminal device 3120 can present the demonstration view 3404 of Figure 3DD based on the detected browsing progress.
  • Demonstration view 3404 The content in the video may be different from the content being presented at the terminal device 3110. In this way, flexible control of the presentation content at the terminal device 3120 can be supported.
  • the user when browsing freely in the demonstration mode, can also be allowed to reposition to the demonstration progress of the document 3105 at the terminal device 3110.
  • the current demonstration progress can be positioned by initiating a demonstration positioning indication.
  • the demonstration positioning indication can include one or more indications. If a demonstration positioning indication is detected, the terminal device 3120 can present a demonstration view of the document according to the demonstration progress of the document 3105 at the terminal device 3110.
  • a specific control such as a demonstration follow-up control, can be provided, and a demonstration positioning indication can be initiated by triggering the control.
  • a demonstration follow-up control 3428 can be provided in the demonstration view 3404, and the current demonstration progress of the document 3105 at the terminal device 3110 can be positioned by triggering the control.
  • a demonstration positioning indication can also be initiated by a specific gesture operation or other operation.
  • the page view can support the user's free browsing of the document and also support the tracking and positioning of the presentation progress. For example, while presenting the page view, the current presentation progress can be positioned by initiating a presentation positioning indication. If a presentation positioning indication is detected, the terminal device 3120 can present the page view of the document 3110 according to the presentation progress of the document 3105 at the terminal device 3110.
  • a presentation follow-up control 3428 may also be provided to locate the presentation progress of the document 3105 at the terminal device 3110. After locating the corresponding presentation progress, the document content at the corresponding progress is presented in the document view.
  • the comment function of the terminal device 3120 for accessing the document 3105 is particularly supported to receive comment information input by the user for one or more fragments of the document 3105 .
  • the terminal device 3120 provides 3225 the comment information to the terminal device 3110 .
  • the terminal device 3120 may send the received comment information to the management device 3130, and the management device 3130 may synchronize the comment information to the terminal device 3110. In this embodiment, the terminal device 3120 can send the received comment information directly to the terminal device 3110.
  • users may be allowed to comment on segments of any size in the document 3105.
  • Such segments may include, for example, a single character, a single word, multiple characters/words, paragraphs, pictures, tables, and the like.
  • the terminal device 3120 may receive a user selection of a segment in the document 3105, and provide an input box for entering a comment in response to detecting a comment indication.
  • the comment information may include new comment content for a segment of the document 3105, or may include feedback or replies to existing comments in the document 3105.
  • comment information may be allowed to be entered in the presentation view and/or page view of the document 3105.
  • terminal device 3120 can detect the user's selection of a fragment 3430 in browsing page 3404, and accordingly present a comment control 3432. If a trigger of comment control 3432 by user 3104 is received, terminal device 3120 can present a comment box 3440 as shown in Figure 3DF in browsing page 3404, where user 3104 can enter comment information.
  • the terminal device 3120 may also present the comment information in response to a trigger by the user 3104. For example, as shown in FIG3DG, if the display comment control 3424 is triggered, the terminal device 3120 may present a previously input comment box 3440, together with other comment boxes 3442.
  • the comment box 3442 includes comment information for the fragment 3434 in the browse page 3404.
  • the terminal device 3120 may also detect a reply from the user 3112 to the comment information, such as a reply in the comment box 3442.
  • the terminal device 3120 can detect the comment information input by the user, including new comments or replies to comments, and provide it to the terminal device 3110 so that the comments on the document 3105 can be synchronized between the various devices.
  • the presentation mode of the document In this case, it supports rich interactive capabilities for documents, allowing users to browse and interact with documents as needed.
  • the terminal device 3110 after obtaining the comment information, the terminal device 3110 associates the comment information with one or more corresponding segments of the document 3105.
  • the document presenter e.g., user 3102
  • the audience e.g., user 3104
  • the terminal device 3110 associates the comment information with one or more corresponding segments of the document 3105.
  • the terminal device 3110 may obtain the comment information of the user 3104 on one or more segments of the document 3105 from the management device 3130, or may directly obtain such comment information from the terminal device 3120. In some embodiments, if multiple terminal devices 3120 all comment on the document 3105, the terminal device 3110 may also obtain the comment information provided by the multiple terminal devices 3120. In some embodiments, the terminal device 3120 may also obtain the comment information of other terminal devices 3120 on the document 3105. Such comment information synchronization may be coordinated by the management device 3130 or the terminal device 3110, for example.
  • the presentation of prompts about the comment information can be suspended, such as suspending the notification that new comment information has arrived, or suspending the presentation of the comment information itself.
  • the comment information received during the presentation of the document 3105 can also be presented according to the needs of the presenter.
  • the terminal device 3110 can detect an indication of permission to present the comment information. If such an indication of permission to present is detected, the terminal device 3110 can present the received comment information in the presentation view of the document. For example, if the user 3102 expects to maintain interaction with the audience during the presentation, or expects to reply to the audience's comments in a concentrated manner after the content of the document is presented, the user 3102 can trigger an indication of permission to present the comment information before the document 3105 enters the presentation mode or during the presentation.
  • the indication of permission to present can indicate that the comment information received during the presentation of the document 3105 is presented, thereby avoiding the presentation of comment information that is not related to this presentation. It should be understood that the reminder or presentation of the comment information can be specifically configured according to the actual application needs.
  • the terminal device 3110 may also send a permission presentation indication for the comment information to the terminal device 3120. In response to such an indication, the terminal device 3120 may also present the comment information received at the terminal or other terminal devices 3120 in the presentation view of the document 3105.
  • the comment information may be presented in the form of a bullet screen at the terminal device 3110 and/or the terminal device 3120. In some embodiments, the comment information may be presented in a specific area of the page, similar to the examples shown in Figures 3DF and 3DG.
  • the comment information received while the document 3105 is being presented it is also possible to allow the comment information received while the document 3105 is being presented to be specially marked, for example, marking the comment information as being obtained when the document 3105 is being presented. In this way, it is convenient for the user to distinguish the comment information collected in this presentation from other comment information.
  • the user 3104 may also be allowed to perform a special identification of the document 3105 to mark the document as the state desired by the user. Specifically, if the terminal device 3120 receives a special identification request corresponding to the interactive operation for the document 3105, the terminal device 3120 may also mark the document 3104 as the state corresponding to the special identification request.
  • the special identification request may, for example, request that the document 3105 be identified as a collection state, a like state, a follow state (e.g., follow a document comment), or any other allowable identification.
  • the terminal device 3120 may present more functions that are allowed to be executed on the document 3105, including "Collect Document", "Follow Document Comment", etc.
  • the user 3104 can continue to obtain information about the document 3105 after the presentation.
  • the terminal device 3120 can also automatically store access records about the document 3105 to at least record the access path information of the document 3105. In this way, the user 3104 can continue to access the document 3105 as needed after the presentation.
  • the storage of the identification or access record of the document 3105 may be performed based on the permission configuration of the administrator of the document 3105, such as the user 3102.
  • the user 3102 may configure whether to allow the terminal device receiving the document 3105 to be accessed when the document is presented. Hide documents, follow comments on documents, visit documents again later, etc. In this way, document managers can more flexibly control various types of interactive permissions for documents.
  • FIG. 3E shows a flowchart of a process 3500 for document interaction according to some embodiments of the present disclosure.
  • the process 3500 may be implemented at the terminal device 3110.
  • terminal device 3110 presents access path information of the document in a presentation view of the document while the document is being presented.
  • terminal device 3110 provides the presentation view of the document to at least one second terminal device based on an access request including the access path information initiated by at least one second terminal device (e.g., at least one terminal device 3120).
  • process 3500 also includes: obtaining comment information for at least one segment of the document from at least one second terminal device; and associating the comment information to at least one segment of the document.
  • presenting the access path information of the document includes: detecting a sharing indication during presentation of the document; and presenting the access path information of the document in response to detecting the sharing indication during presentation.
  • process 3500 further includes: if comment information is received while the document is being presented, suspending presentation of a prompt regarding the comment information.
  • process 3500 also includes: detecting a presentation permission indication for the comment information; and presenting the comment information in the presentation view of the document in response to detecting the presentation permission indication.
  • process 3500 further includes: providing a presentation permission indication to at least one second terminal device, so that the comment information is presented at the at least one second terminal device.
  • associating the comment information with the at least one segment of the document includes: if the comment information is received while the document is being presented, marking the comment information to indicate that the comment information was obtained while the document was being presented.
  • FIG. 3F shows a flowchart of a process 3600 for document interaction according to some embodiments of the present disclosure.
  • the process 3600 may be implemented at the terminal device 3120.
  • the terminal device 3120 obtains access path information of a document, and the document is being presented at a first terminal device (e.g., the terminal device 3110).
  • the terminal device 3120 sends an access request for the document, and the access request includes the access path information.
  • the terminal device 3120 receives the presentation view of the document.
  • the terminal device 3120 presents the presentation view of the document in a presentation mode.
  • presenting a presentation view of a document includes: in a presentation mode, presenting a presentation view of the document according to a presentation progress of the document at a first terminal device.
  • process 3600 also includes: if a presentation exit indication is detected, exiting presentation mode; detecting browsing progress of the document at the second terminal device; and presenting a page view of the document based on the detected browsing progress.
  • process 3600 also includes: if a presentation follow indication is detected, entering a presentation mode; and presenting a presentation view of the document according to the presentation progress of the document at the first terminal device.
  • process 3600 also includes: if a presentation positioning indication is detected, presenting a page view of the document according to the presentation progress of the document at the first terminal device.
  • presenting a demonstration view of a document includes: in a demonstration mode, detecting a browsing progress of the document at a second terminal device; and presenting the demonstration view of the document based on the detected browsing progress.
  • presenting the presentation view of the document further includes: if a presentation positioning indication is detected, presenting the presentation view of the document according to the presentation progress of the document at the first terminal device.
  • process 3600 also includes: receiving comment information for at least one document fragment of the document; and providing the comment information to the first terminal device.
  • process 3600 also includes: if it is determined that the interactive operation corresponds to a free browsing indication for the document, presenting a browsing page of the document independently of the presentation progress of the document at the first terminal device; and if it is determined that the interactive operation corresponds to a presentation follow indication for the document, presenting a presentation view of the document based on the presentation progress of the document at the first terminal device.
  • process 3600 also includes: receiving a presentation permission indication for the comment information from the first terminal device; and presenting the comment information in the presentation view of the document in response to the presentation permission indication.
  • process 3600 further includes: if it is determined that the interaction operation corresponds to a pointer A special identification request for a document will mark the document as the status corresponding to the special identification request.
  • process 3600 also includes: storing access records about the document, the access records including at least access path information of the document.
  • FIG. 3G shows a block diagram of a first device 3700 for document interaction according to some embodiments of the present disclosure.
  • the first device 3700 may be implemented as or included in a terminal device 3110.
  • Each module/component in the first device 3700 may be implemented by hardware, software, firmware, or any combination thereof.
  • the first device 3700 includes an access path presenting module 3710, which is configured to present the access path information of the document in the presentation view of the document while the document is being presented.
  • the first device 3700 also includes a view providing module 3720, which is configured to send the presentation view of the document to at least one second device based on an access request including the access path information initiated by at least one second device.
  • the first device 3700 also includes: a comment obtaining module configured to obtain comment information for at least one segment of a document from at least one second device; and a comment associating module configured to associate the comment information to at least one segment of the document.
  • the access path presentation module 3710 includes: a sharing indication detection module, configured to detect a sharing indication during a presentation of a document; and a presentation module based on a sharing indication, configured to present access path information of the document in response to detecting a sharing indication during a presentation.
  • the first device 3700 further includes a postponement prompt module configured to postpone presentation of a prompt regarding the comment information if comment information is received while the document is being presented.
  • the first device 3700 also includes a presentation indication detection module configured to: detect a presentation permission indication for comment information; and a comment presentation module configured to present the comment information in a presentation view of the document in response to detecting the presentation permission indication.
  • a presentation indication detection module configured to: detect a presentation permission indication for comment information
  • a comment presentation module configured to present the comment information in a presentation view of the document in response to detecting the presentation permission indication.
  • the first device 3700 also includes a presentation indication providing module configured to provide a presentation permission indication to at least one second device so that the comment information is presented at the at least one second device.
  • the comment association module includes: a comment marking module configured to If the comment information is received while the document is being presented, the comment information is marked to indicate that the comment information was obtained while the document was being presented.
  • FIG. 3H shows a block diagram of a second device 3800 for document interaction according to some embodiments of the present disclosure.
  • the second device 3800 may be implemented as or included in the terminal device 3120.
  • Each module/component in the second device 3800 may be implemented by hardware, software, firmware, or any combination thereof.
  • the second device 3800 includes an access acquisition module 3810, which is configured to obtain access path information of a document, and the document is being demonstrated at the first device.
  • the second device 3800 also includes a request initiation module 3820, which is configured to initiate an access request for the document, and the access request includes the access path information.
  • the second device 3800 also includes a view receiving module 3830, which is configured to receive a demonstration view of the document.
  • the second device 3800 also includes a view presenting module 3840, which is configured to present the demonstration view of the document in a demonstration mode.
  • the view presentation module 3840 includes: a first presentation module based on presentation progress, configured to present a presentation view of the document according to the presentation progress of the document at the first device in the presentation mode.
  • the second device 3800 also includes: a demonstration exit module, configured to exit the demonstration mode if a demonstration exit indication is detected; a browsing progress detection module, configured to detect the browsing progress of the document at the second device; and a page view presentation module, configured to present a page view of the document based on the detected browsing progress.
  • a demonstration exit module configured to exit the demonstration mode if a demonstration exit indication is detected
  • a browsing progress detection module configured to detect the browsing progress of the document at the second device
  • a page view presentation module configured to present a page view of the document based on the detected browsing progress.
  • the second device 3800 also includes: a presentation mode entry module, configured to enter the presentation mode if a presentation follow indication is detected; and a second presentation module based on presentation progress, configured to present a presentation view of the document according to the presentation progress of the document at the first device.
  • the second device 3800 further includes: a first presentation positioning module configured to present a page view of the document according to a presentation progress of the document at the first device if a presentation positioning indication is detected.
  • a first presentation positioning module configured to present a page view of the document according to a presentation progress of the document at the first device if a presentation positioning indication is detected.
  • the view presentation module 3840 includes: a demonstration browsing module configured to detect the browsing progress of the document at the second device in the demonstration mode; and The browsing progress presentation module is configured to present a presentation view of the document based on the detected browsing progress. In some embodiments, the view presentation module 3840 also includes: a first presentation positioning module, configured to present a presentation view of the document according to the presentation progress of the document at the first device if a presentation positioning indication is detected.
  • the second device 3800 further includes: a comment receiving module configured to receive comment information for at least one document segment of the document; and a comment providing module configured to provide the comment information to the first device.
  • the second device 3800 also includes a free browsing module, configured to: if it is determined that the interaction operation corresponds to a free browsing indication for the document, present a browsing page of the document independently of the presentation progress of the document at the first device; and a presentation following module, configured to present a presentation view of the document based on the presentation progress of the document at the first device if it is determined that the interaction operation corresponds to a presentation following indication for the document.
  • a free browsing module configured to: if it is determined that the interaction operation corresponds to a free browsing indication for the document, present a browsing page of the document independently of the presentation progress of the document at the first device
  • a presentation following module configured to present a presentation view of the document based on the presentation progress of the document at the first device if it is determined that the interaction operation corresponds to a presentation following indication for the document.
  • the second device 3800 also includes a presentation indication receiving module configured to: receive an indication of allowing presentation of comment information from the first device; and a comment presentation module configured to present the comment information in a presentation view of the document in response to the indication of allowing presentation.
  • the second device 3800 also includes a document marking module, which is configured to: if it is determined that the interactive operation corresponds to a special identification request for the document, mark the document as a state corresponding to the special identification request.
  • the second device 3800 also includes an access record storage module, which is configured to: store access records about documents, and the access records at least include access path information of the documents.
  • an electronic device 4110 can display the content of a document 4112.
  • the electronic device 4110 can present a view 4120 for the document 4112.
  • the electronic device 4110 can present the content in the document 4112 in the view 4120.
  • the document 4112 can be any document format suitable for presentation, such as a word document, etc.
  • the document 4112 can be stored in a storage device of the electronic device 4110, or in a cloud storage that can communicate with the electronic device 4110.
  • view 4120 may be provided by, for example, a document editing application or a document presentation application in electronic device 4110. View 4120 may have a display area that is suitable for the display area size of electronic device 4110, or may have other appropriate predetermined or user-specified display area. In some embodiments, view 4120 may include a document view, such as an editing view of document 4112. Additionally or alternatively, view 4120 may also include a presentation view for providing a presentation of document 4112.
  • user 4102 may interact with electronic device 4110.
  • user 4102 may perform various interactive operations on view 4120 of document 4112 by interacting with electronic device 4110.
  • Various interactive processes between user 4102 and electronic device 4110 will be described in detail below.
  • the electronic device 4110 may be any type of mobile terminal, fixed terminal or portable terminal, including a mobile phone, a desktop computer, a laptop computer, a notebook computer, a netbook computer, a tablet computer, a media computer, a multimedia tablet, a personal communication system (PCS) device, a personal navigation device, a personal digital assistant (PDA), an audio/video player, a digital camera/camcorder, a positioning device, a television receiver, a radio broadcast receiver, an e-book device, a gaming device or any combination of the foregoing, including accessories and peripherals of these devices or any combination thereof.
  • the electronic device 4110 may also support any type of interface for the user (such as a "wearable" circuit, etc.).
  • document presentations are present in all aspects of people's lives, work, and social life, such as conference reports, corporate publicity, product promotion, event presentations, and other fields.
  • a brief speech on the full text is given at the beginning of a document presentation, followed by a detailed report on the specific content of the full text.
  • a quick report speech may be given on the content that needs to be focused on in the meeting, i.e., a content introduction.
  • contents that need to be focused on are usually only part of the content of the document.
  • a conventional solution for document presentation is a pure report such as a PowerPoint presentation.
  • the presentation usually only contains the content that needs to be focused on, but does not have more detailed document content.
  • This kind of presentation document presentation solution is only suitable for guiding the focus content, but cannot provide a lecture or presentation of the specific content.
  • Another conventional solution for document presentation is pure reading in the form of a document.
  • This pure reading in the form of a document is difficult to provide a guided presentation of the content that needs to be focused on.
  • this pure document presentation usually fails to highlight the key content of the presentation, and this presentation is usually boring and unsatisfactory.
  • the current document presentation solutions cannot meet the requirements of both demonstrating the key contents of the document and providing a detailed presentation of the specific contents of the document. Therefore, it is hoped that a document presentation solution that can both present and demonstrate the document can be proposed to improve the user experience.
  • an improved document content display solution is proposed.
  • a portion of the content in the document can be selected in the current view of the document, for example, a target content block in a content block in the document can be selected.
  • a target view including at least one content page is generated based on the target content block.
  • the content of the target content block is displayed in at least one content page.
  • the solution can support the selection of partial contents of a document (i.e., a target content block), and support the presentation interface for presenting the selected partial contents.
  • a document i.e., a target content block
  • the presentation interface for presenting the selected partial contents.
  • a document can be presented partially or completely.
  • partial contents of a document can be presented without creating a separate presentation. In this way, the presentation scenarios of a document can be greatly broadened, thereby providing more diverse and flexible document presentations.
  • FIG. 4B shows a flow chart of a process 4200 for document content display according to some embodiments of the present disclosure.
  • the process 4200 may be implemented at an electronic device 4110.
  • the process 4200 will be described with reference to the environment 4100 of FIG. 4A.
  • electronic device 4110 receives a selection operation on a target content block in the content blocks within document 4112 in the current view of document 4112 to determine the target content block.
  • user 4102 may select the target content block using a mouse, a pointing device, a stylus, a finger, etc.
  • the target content block in the document 4112 can be selected by the electronic device 4110.
  • the embodiments of the present disclosure are not limited in this respect.
  • the electronic device 4110 can determine the selection of the target content block by the user 4102. These selected target content blocks will be presented in the subsequent document content display process. In this way, the user can select the partial content of the document that is expected to be demonstrated, thereby enabling the demonstration of the partial content of the document. The detailed process of demonstrating the partial content of the document will be described in detail below.
  • document 4112 may be a document such as one based on the DocX architecture.
  • Document 4112 may include multiple content blocks.
  • one or more content items may be carried within the architecture of document 4112.
  • a content block may be an entity in a document.
  • a content block may also be the smallest editing unit of document 4112.
  • a content block may be a paragraph of text, a picture, a table, a piece of code, a link, and so on.
  • Document 4112 may be viewed as a collection of multiple content blocks, or as a container including multiple content blocks.
  • a "content block” may also be referred to as a "block", "content item” or "content area”.
  • a target content block may be selected by selecting a content block in document 4112.
  • document 4112 may also be based on other existing or future document architectures that can support partial selection of document content. The embodiments of the present disclosure are not limited in this respect.
  • electronic device 4110 may detect selection of a target area in document 4112.
  • the target content block may include a content block located in the target area.
  • user 4102 may select a target area in document 4112 by selecting a mouse or touching a finger.
  • Electronic device 4110 may determine the target content block by detecting selection of the target area.
  • the current view of document 4112 may be a first view, such as a document page view.
  • first view the view in which document 4112 can be edited or otherwise performed.
  • electronic device 4110 may obtain the moving path of the current focus, and use the content block on the moving path as the target content block to be selected. Additionally or alternatively, electronic device 4110 may determine the content block corresponding to the current focus position, and use the content block as the target content block according to the quick selection indication. Content blocks.
  • electronic device 4110 may also receive an indication of content filtering. If electronic device 4110 receives an indication of content filtering, electronic device 4110 may determine all content blocks under the current view and generate a preset mark at the associated position of each content block. Electronic device 4110 may also receive an edit operation on the preset mark. Electronic device 4110 may also determine a target content block based on the edit operation on the preset mark.
  • the preset mark may have an unchecked initial state.
  • the preset mark may be a selection box with an unchecked initial state.
  • the electronic device 4110 may receive a confirmation of the selection of the preset mark.
  • the preset mark may have a selected initial state.
  • the preset mark may be a selection box that has been selected.
  • the electronic device 4110 may receive a cancellation of the selection of the preset mark.
  • the electronic device 4110 may determine the content block corresponding to the selected preset mark after the marking operation as the target content block.
  • the current view of document 4112 may be a second view.
  • the second view may be generated based on the first view.
  • the view generated based on the first view is referred to as a "second view".
  • the second view may be a presentation page view generated based on a document page view.
  • electronic device 4110 may receive an indication of content filtering. If electronic device 4110 receives an indication of content filtering, electronic device 4110 may determine all content blocks under the second view and generate a preset mark at the associated position of each content block. Electronic device 4110 may also receive an editing operation on the preset mark. Electronic device 4110 may also determine the target content block based on the editing operation on the preset mark.
  • the preset mark may have an initial state of being unchecked.
  • the preset mark may be a selection box with an initial state of being unchecked.
  • the electronic device 4110 may receive a confirmation of the selection of the preset mark.
  • the preset mark may have an initial state of being selected.
  • the preset mark may be a selection box that has been selected.
  • the electronic device 4110 may receive a cancellation of the selection of the preset mark.
  • the electronic device 4110 may select the selected item after the marking operation.
  • the content block corresponding to the preset mark in is determined as the target content block.
  • the electronic device 4110 can obtain the moving path of the current focus, and use the content block on the moving path as the target content block for selection. Additionally or alternatively, the electronic device 4110 can determine the content block corresponding to the current focus position, and use the content block as the target content block according to the quick selection indication.
  • the electronic device 4110 can determine the target content block by using the moving path or position of the current focus and by using different methods such as preset marks.
  • the moving path or position of the current focus can be used to determine the target content block in the first view.
  • Only the preset mark can be used to determine the target content block in the second view.
  • the methods for determining the target content block that can be used in different views can be pre-set, or can be flexibly selected or changed. The embodiments of the present disclosure are not limited in this respect.
  • Figures 4CA to 4CC show schematic diagrams of examples of selecting a target content block of a document 4112 according to some embodiments of the present disclosure. It should be understood that the page shown in Figure 4CA and the pages in other figures described below are merely examples, and various page designs may actually exist. The various graphic elements in the page may have different arrangements and different visual representations, one or more of which may be omitted or replaced, and one or more other elements may also exist. The embodiments of the present disclosure are not limited in this respect.
  • view 4300 may include a first view or a document page view.
  • View 4300 may be a document editing view, a document viewing view, and the like provided by electronic device 4110.
  • document 4112 may have fewer or more content blocks.
  • the content blocks of document 4112 are all text blocks, in other embodiments, the content blocks may also be other content blocks, such as picture blocks, tables, and the like. Blocks, etc.
  • specific texts are presented in the drawings, such texts do not constitute any limitations on the embodiments of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 4CB the selection of some content blocks in view 4300 in FIG. 4CA is shown.
  • electronic device 4110 can obtain the moving path of the current focus and use the content blocks on the moving path as the selected target content blocks.
  • moving path 4306 also referred to as a track
  • Electronic device 4110 can detect moving path 4306 and use content blocks 4310 and content blocks 4320 located on moving path 4306 as selected target content blocks.
  • electronic device 4110 may also use a region of a predetermined shape (e.g., a rectangle) covering moving path 4306 as the detected target region.
  • a region of a predetermined shape e.g., a rectangle
  • content block 4310 and content block 4320 are at least partially located within the detected target region, while content block 4330 and content block 4340 are not located within the target region.
  • electronic device 4110 determines content block 4310 and content block 4320 as the target content blocks selected by the user.
  • the target content blocks selected by the user in FIG. 4CB namely, content block 4310 and content block 4320, are shown in view 4300 as content blocks with a background color.
  • a scroll bar control (not shown) or a page turning control (not shown) may also be arranged in the view 4300 to position the content of the document 4112 presented in the view 4300.
  • a close control (not shown) may also be arranged in the view 4300. The electronic device 4110 may detect a trigger indication of the close control to close the view 4300.
  • FIG. 4CD to 4CF are schematic diagrams showing another example of selecting the content of document 4112 according to some embodiments of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 4CD to FIG. 4CF several content blocks after content blocks 4310 to 4340 in document 4112 are presented in view 4300, such as content block 4360 including the name of Table 1, content block 4370 including a table, and content block 4380 including a paragraph of text.
  • the content in FIG. 4CD can be presented in view 4300 through a scroll bar control or a page turning control. It should be understood that although specific text and tables are presented in the figure, such text and tables do not constitute a selection of the content of the present disclosure. any limitations of the embodiments.
  • electronic device 4110 may determine the content block corresponding to the current focus position, and use the content block as the target content block according to a quick selection indication. For example, when the current focus is at the position indicated by arrow 4362, content block 4360 may be determined as the target content block by quick selection indications such as a single or double click of a mouse, or a touch or press of a finger. Similarly, when the current focus is at the position indicated by arrow 4364, content block 4370 may be determined as the target content block by any appropriate quick selection indication.
  • the target content blocks selected by the user in FIG. 4CE namely, content block 4360 and content block 4370 , are shown as content blocks with a gray background color in view 4300 .
  • electronic device 4110 may add content block 4310 and content block 4320 to the target content block in the examples of Figures 4CB to 4CC, and add content block 4360 and content block 4370 to the target content block in the examples of Figures 4CE to 4CF. That is, the target content block may include content block 4310, content block 4320, content block 4360, and content block 4370.
  • the above describes several processes of determining the target content block by using the moving path or position of the current focus when the current view is the first view in combination with Figures 4CA to 4CF. It should be understood that the above example process can also be applied to the example when the current view is the second view. In addition, in some embodiments, in the example when the current view is the first view or the second view, the content screening mode can also be used to determine the target content block.
  • the electronic device 4110 can receive an indication of content screening.
  • a content screening control 4410 is arranged in the view 4400.
  • the user 4102 can trigger an indication of content screening by, for example, clicking or touching the content screening control 4410.
  • a presentation setting control 4420 is also arranged in the view 4400.
  • the user 4102 can modify the presentation of the target content block by triggering the presentation setting control 4420. For example, modify the size and background of the view, etc.
  • the electronic device 4110 can change the presentation form of the target content block according to the needs of the user 4102, such as switching multiple views.
  • the display scene of the document 4112 can be greatly broadened.
  • electronic device 4110 can determine all content blocks under the second view, and generate preset marks at the associated position of each content block.
  • the preset mark can include a selection box. Taking the preset mark as a selection box as an example, if content screening control 4410 is selected (shown as having a shaded frame line), electronic device 4110 can detect an indication of content screening. In this case, electronic device 4110 can present multiple selection boxes associated with multiple content blocks of document 4112 in view 4400. For example, selection box 4412 associated with content block 4310, selection box 4414 associated with content block 4320, selection box 4416 associated with content block 4330, and selection box 4418 associated with content block 4340 (as shown in Figures 4DB to 4DE).
  • the electronic device 4110 may also receive an edit operation on a preset mark.
  • the electronic device 4110 may also determine a target content block based on the edit operation on the preset mark. Taking the preset mark as a selection box as an example, the electronic device 4110 may determine a selected target content block based on at least one selected selection box.
  • the preset mark may have an unselected initial state.
  • the preset mark may be a selection box with an unselected initial state.
  • the electronic device 4110 may receive a confirmation selection of the preset mark.
  • the electronic device 4110 may determine the content block corresponding to the selected preset mark after the marking operation as the target content block.
  • the user may change one or more selection boxes to a selected state as needed.
  • the selection indication of the selection box may be a confirmation selection indication of the selection box.
  • the electronic device 4110 may determine at least one content block associated with at least one selection box in which the confirmation selection indication is detected as the selected target content block.
  • selection boxes 4412, 4414, 4416, and 4418 are unchecked by default.
  • User 4102 can confirm the selection of one or more selection boxes as needed to make one or more selection boxes become checked.
  • An example of a confirmation selection indication of a selection box by user 4102 is shown in 4400.
  • Selection boxes 4412 and 4414 in which a check mark “ ⁇ ” is presented are the selection boxes selected by user 4102, that is, the selection boxes whose confirmation selection indication is detected by electronic device 4110.
  • Electronic device 4110 can confirm content block 4310 associated with selection box 4412 and content block 4320 associated with selection box 4414 as selected target content blocks.
  • the selected content block is presented as having a gray background color to indicate that it is selected.
  • the preset mark may have an initial state of being selected.
  • the preset mark may be a selection box that has been selected.
  • the electronic device 4110 may receive a deselection of the preset mark.
  • the user may confirm the deselection of one or more selection boxes as needed, so that the one or more selection boxes become unselected.
  • the selection indication of the selection box may be a deselection indication of the selection box.
  • the electronic device 4110 may determine the content blocks associated with other selection boxes except at least one selection box in which the deselection indication is detected among the multiple selection boxes as the selected target content blocks.
  • the multiple selection boxes 4412, 4414, 4416, and 4418 presented in the view 4400 of FIG. 4DD are unchecked by default, that is, a check mark " ⁇ " is presented in the selection box.
  • each content block selected by default is also shown as selected content with a gray background.
  • User 4102 can confirm the deselection of one or more selection boxes as needed, so that one or more selection boxes become unchecked. In this case, when user 4102 triggers a selection indication for one of the selection boxes, the deselection indication for the selection box can be triggered. For example, user 4102 can trigger the deselection indication for selection box 4416 and selection box 4418.
  • FIG. 4DE An example of a user 4102 indicating a deselection of a selection box is shown in view 4400 of FIG. 4DE. Compared with the various selection boxes in FIG. 4DD, it can be seen that selection box 4416 and selection box 4418 have changed from a selected state to an unselected state.
  • electronic device 4110 can determine the content blocks associated with selection box 4412 and selection box 4414 that have not been deselected as the target content blocks selected by user 4102. In other words, electronic device 4110 can confirm content block 4310 associated with selection box 4412 and content block 4320 associated with selection box 4414 as the selected target content blocks.
  • the unselected content block is presented as having a gray background color to indicate that it belongs to the selected target content block.
  • view 4400 is the second view
  • view 4400 may also include the first view.
  • the embodiments of the present disclosure are not limited in this respect.
  • the user 4102 can flexibly choose to use mouse frame selection, mouse click selection, touch screen control, selection box screening, etc. to select the target content block in the first view or the second view. These flexible methods of determining the target content block further improve the user experience.
  • the electronic device 4110 receives a content presentation indication for a target content block when the target content block is determined.
  • the current view is a first view, such as view 4300.
  • a first control can be displayed at an associated position of any determined target content block.
  • Electronic device 4110 can receive a content demonstration indication of the target content block through the first control.
  • User 4102 can trigger the first control, such as by clicking a mouse or touching a finger, etc.
  • the form of the trigger indication used herein is not limited in this respect.
  • Electronic device 4110 can detect various content demonstration indications.
  • the current view is a second view, such as view 4400.
  • a second control may be displayed at a preset position in a page of the second view.
  • the electronic device 4110 may receive a content demonstration indication of a target content block through the second control.
  • the user 4102 may trigger the second control, such as by clicking a mouse or touching a finger, etc.
  • the form of the trigger indication adopted herein is not limited in this respect.
  • the electronic device 4110 may detect various content demonstration indications.
  • the electronic device 4110 determines whether a content presentation indication is detected. If the electronic device 4110 detects a content presentation indication at block 4230, the electronic device 4110 generates a target view including at least one content page based on the target content block at block 4240. The content of the target content block is displayed in at least one content page. Conversely, if the electronic device 4110 detects a content presentation indication at block 4230, the electronic device 4110 generates a target view including at least one content page based on the target content block at block 4240. The content of the target content block is displayed in at least one content page.
  • the electronic device 4110 may return to block 4220 to continue receiving content demonstration indications for the target content block when the target content block is determined. For example, the electronic device 4110 may continuously or at a predetermined time interval detect the indication of content demonstration when the target content block is determined.
  • the electronic device 4110 may also return to block 4210 (not shown) to continue receiving a selection operation on a target content block in the content blocks within the document.
  • block 4210 and block 4220 may be executed in parallel. That is, the electronic device 4110 may detect a content demonstration indication while continuing to detect the selection of the target content block while a portion of the content block has been selected.
  • the electronic device 4110 may determine the number of content pages included in the target view based on at least one of the type, content volume, and content relevance of the target content block.
  • the electronic device 4110 may display the target content block in the corresponding content page.
  • the electronic device 4110 may determine the number of content pages included in the target view according to the content volume of the target content block and the size of the content page. For another example, the electronic device 4110 may layout the target content volume in the content page according to the type or content relevance of the target content block, and layout the content blocks of the same type or content relevance in the target content block in the same content page. The electronic device 4110 may determine the number of content pages included in the target view according to the layout of the target content block.
  • the size of the target content block in the content page can be set according to the type of the target content block. For example, if the target content block is a picture, it can occupy a larger area in the content page. For another example, if the target content block is a phrase, it can occupy a smaller area in the content page.
  • the number of content pages included in the target view is determined according to the sizes occupied by different target content blocks in the content page.
  • the target content block under the current view may include an interactive mark.
  • the interactive mark may be used to add or display comments.
  • a user may The user may comment on a certain content block in the document 4112, such as a paragraph, a phrase or a word.
  • an interactive logo may be displayed at the location of the content block or next to the content block.
  • the interactive logo can be hidden in the target view of the generated target content block. By hiding the interactive logo, the presentation interface can be made more concise and interference can be removed.
  • the interactive logo can also be displayed in the target view of the generated target content block. For example, the user can choose to hide or display the interactive logo. In this way, the interactive logo can be displayed when the user performs an interactive operation accordingly, so as to perform the interactive operation.
  • the electronic device 4110 may display the interactive content in the corresponding content page of the target view in response to the triggering operation of the interactive identifier. For example, the electronic device 4110 may receive the triggering of the interactive identifier in the second view, thereby displaying the comment content corresponding to the interactive identifier. In this way, the interactive identifier can still be displayed in the presentation state of the document 4112, thereby providing interactive operations.
  • the electronic device 4110 may also receive a content export instruction for the target content block when the target content block is determined.
  • the content export instruction may be received via a content export control.
  • the content export control may be located at any position of the first view or the second view.
  • the user may trigger the content export control in any manner. The scope of the present disclosure is not limited in this respect.
  • FIG. 4E shows a schematic diagram of an example of interacting with a target content block of a selected document 4112 according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • electronic device 4110 in view 4500, when it is detected that the position indicated by arrow 4364 is selected, that is, content block 4360 is selected (illustrated as a shaded box), electronic device 4110 can detect further interaction with the selected target content block.
  • View 4500 can be a first view, or alternatively can be a second view.
  • user 4102 can double-click the mouse at the position of arrow 4364, select the right button of the mouse, press a finger, etc., to trigger the presentation of function bar 4510. If the trigger is detected, electronic device 4110 can present function bar 4510 on view 4500.
  • function bar 4510 can be presented in view 4500 by default or according to configuration without user triggering.
  • various interactive functions may be included in the function bar 4510.
  • icon 4512 indicates copying, that is, the selected target content block or the currently selected content block 4360 may be copied.
  • icon 4514 indicates cutting, which may cut the selected target content block or the currently selected content block 4360.
  • icon 4516 indicates deleting, which may delete the selected target content block or the currently selected content block 4360.
  • function bar 4510 includes a demonstration icon 4518.
  • User 4102 can indicate content demonstration by triggering demonstration icon 4518. That is, if electronic device 4110 detects the triggering of demonstration icon 4518, it means that an indication of content demonstration has been detected. When an indication of content demonstration is detected, electronic device 4110 can present a demonstration page view for displaying the target content block. Examples of demonstration page views will be described below in conjunction with Figures 4FA and 4FB.
  • the function bar 4510 may include a comment icon 4518.
  • the comment icon 4518 is also referred to as an interactive identifier.
  • the user 4102 can add a comment to the selected target content block or the currently selected content block 4360 by triggering the comment icon 4518. Additionally, the user 4102 can view the comments previously added to the selected target content block or the currently selected content block 4360 by triggering the comment icon 4518.
  • the function bar 4510 may include an export icon 4524.
  • the user 4102 may trigger the export icon 4524 to indicate the export of the target content block. If the electronic device 4110 detects the triggering of the export icon 4524, that is, detects the indication of content export, the electronic device 4110 may save the selected target content block in the document 4112 as another document. In some embodiments, the function bar 4510 may also not include the export icon 4524. When the indication of content presentation is detected, the electronic device 4110 may automatically export the target content block as another document. The other document may be stored in the storage device of the electronic device 4110, or in a cloud storage in communication with the electronic device 4110.
  • the other document can be directly opened in the subsequent presentation process of the document 4112 without reselecting the content of the document 4112.
  • the selected target content block is usually the key content in the document 4112. You can print another saved document to view the key contents in document 4112.
  • Function bar 4510 may include the same or different, more or less functional controls as shown in Figure 4E.
  • function bar 4510 may be hideable, and when user 4102, for example, moves a mouse or finger to a predetermined position of function bar 4510 (e.g., the upper left corner of view 4500 or other appropriate positions), function bar 4510 may be changed from a hidden state to a visible state.
  • function bar 4510 when function bar 4510 is presented, it may be separated from each content block, or at least partially covered above a certain or certain content block. The embodiments of the present disclosure are not limited in this respect.
  • content block 4310, content block 4320, content block 4360, and content block 4370 are selected respectively. If an indication of content presentation is detected while these content blocks are selected, electronic device 4110 will present view 4600. Selected content block 4310, content block 4320, content block 4360, and content block 4370 are presented in view 4600.
  • view 4600 may include a close control 4612.
  • close control 4612 such as clicking close control 4612 with a mouse or pressing close control with a finger
  • electronic device 4110 may detect the trigger.
  • electronic device 4110 may close view 4600 in response to the triggering of close control 4612.
  • close control 4612 can have other shapes and sizes and can be located in other locations in view 4600. Additionally or alternatively, close control 4612 can be hideable and can be hidden when user 4102, for example, moves the mouse to the close control 4612. When the close control 4612 is in position, the close control 4612 can be changed from a hidden state to a visible state.
  • controls such as scroll bar controls and/or page turning controls may also be provided in view 4600 to navigate and locate the target content block presented.
  • the target content block may be presented on multiple content pages.
  • view 4600 may be switched from the currently presented content page to another content page, such as the next page or the previous page.
  • electronic device 4110 detects a trigger to a scroll bar control
  • the content page presented by view 4600 may be scrolled and presented.
  • an interaction mark 4620 may be presented in view 4600.
  • the interaction mark 4620 may be used to indicate that user 4102 has added interactive content, such as a comment, to the content block 4370 at that location.
  • User 4102 may trigger the interaction mark.
  • Electronic device 4110 may display the interactive content, such as a comment added by user 4102, in the corresponding content page of view 4600 in response to the triggering operation of interaction mark 4620.
  • interactive content 4630 is shown in view 4600 of FIG. 4FB.
  • the interactive content 4630 is presented in response to triggering the interactive identifier 4620.
  • the interactive content 4630 may include any appropriate text, emoticons, symbols, and the like.
  • user 4102 may also modify the previous interactive content by triggering interactive mark 4620, etc.
  • user 4102 may reply to the interactive content. In this way, interaction such as interactive functions can still be provided to the user in the view in the demonstration state, thereby improving the user experience.
  • FIG. 4FA and FIG. 4FB and the views or pages in other figures described herein are merely examples, and various interface designs may exist in practice.
  • the various graphical elements in the views may have different arrangements and different visual representations, one or more of the elements may be omitted or replaced, and one or more of the elements may be replaced.
  • the embodiments of the present disclosure are not limited in this respect.
  • FIG. 4G shows a schematic structural block diagram of an apparatus 4700 for document content display according to some embodiments of the present disclosure.
  • the apparatus 4700 may be implemented as or included in the electronic device 4110.
  • Each module/component in the apparatus 4700 may be implemented by hardware, software, firmware, or any combination thereof.
  • the device 4700 includes a target content block determination module 4710, which is configured to receive a selection operation on a target content block in the content blocks within the document 4112 in the current view of the document 4112 to determine the target content block.
  • a target content block determination module 4710 which is configured to receive a selection operation on a target content block in the content blocks within the document 4112 in the current view of the document 4112 to determine the target content block.
  • the apparatus 4700 further includes a content presentation instruction receiving module 4720 configured to receive a content presentation instruction for a target content block when the target content block is determined.
  • the apparatus 4700 further includes a target view generating module 4730 configured to generate a target view including at least one content page based on the target content block.
  • the content of the target content block is displayed in the at least one content page.
  • the current view of the document 4112 is the first view.
  • the target content block determination module 4710 may include: a moving path acquisition module configured to acquire the moving path of the current focus, and use the content block on the moving path as the selected target content block; and/or a focus position determination module configured to determine the content block corresponding to the position of the current focus, and use the content block as the target content block according to the quick selection indication.
  • the current view of the document 4112 is the second view.
  • the second view is generated based on the first view.
  • the target content block determination module 4710 may include: a content screening module, configured to determine all content blocks under the second view in response to receiving an instruction for content screening, and generate a preset mark at an associated position of each content block; an editing operation receiving module, configured to receive an editing operation for the preset mark; and a second target content block determining module, configured to determine the target content block based on the editing operation of the preset mark.
  • the preset mark may have an unselected initial state.
  • the editing operation receiving module may be configured to receive a confirmation of the selection of the preset mark. Additionally or alternatively, the preset mark may have a selected initial state.
  • the editing operation receiving module may be configured to receive a cancellation of the selection of the preset mark.
  • the second target content block determination module is configured to determine the content block corresponding to the preset mark selected after the editing operation as the target content block.
  • the current view of the document 4112 is the first view.
  • the content presentation instruction receiving module 4720 includes a first control module, which is configured to display a first control at a location associated with any determined target content block, and receive a content presentation instruction for the target content block through the first control.
  • the current view of the document 4112 is a second view, which is generated based on the first view.
  • the content demonstration instruction receiving module 4720 includes a second control module, which is configured to display a second control at a preset position in the page of the second view, and receive the content demonstration instruction for the target content block through the second control.
  • the target view generation module 4730 includes: a content page quantity determination module, configured to determine the number of content pages included in the target view based on at least one of the type, content volume and content relevance of the target content block; and a content block display module, configured to display the target content block in the corresponding content page.
  • the content page quantity determination module is configured to determine the quantity of content pages included in the target view according to the content quantity of the target content block and the size of the content page.
  • the content page quantity determination module is configured to layout the target content blocks in the content page according to the type or content relevance of the target content blocks, and layout the content blocks of the same type or content-related in the target content blocks in the same content page; and determine the number of content pages included in the target view according to the layout of the target content blocks.
  • the device 4700 further includes a content export instruction receiving module configured to receive a content export instruction for a target content block when the target content block is determined; and a saving module configured to save the target content block as another document in response to detecting the content export instruction.
  • the target content block under the current view includes an interactive identifier.
  • the target view generation module 4730 can be configured to hide the interactive identifier in the content corresponding to the target content block in the target view. Additionally or alternatively, in some embodiments, the target view generation module 4730 can be configured to display the interactive identifier in the content corresponding to the target content block in the target view.
  • the device 4700 also includes an interactive content display module, which is configured to display the interactive content in the corresponding content page of the target view in response to the triggering operation of the interactive identifier.
  • one or more content blocks may be carried within the framework of the document 4112 , and the content block is the smallest editing unit of the document 4112 .
  • FIG4H shows a block diagram of an electronic device 4800 in which one or more embodiments of the present disclosure may be implemented. It should be understood that the electronic device 4800 shown in FIG4H is merely exemplary and should not constitute any limitation on the functionality and scope of the embodiments described herein. The electronic device 4800 shown in FIG4H may be used to implement the electronic device 1110 of FIG1A , the electronic device 2110 of FIG2A , the electronic device 3110 of FIG3A , and the electronic device 4110 of FIG4A .
  • the electronic device 4800 is in the form of a general electronic device.
  • the components of the electronic device 4800 may include, but are not limited to, one or more processors or processing units 4810, a memory 4820, a storage device 4830, one or more communication units 4840, one or more input devices 4850, and one or more output devices 4860.
  • the processing unit 4810 may be an actual or virtual processor and is capable of performing various processes according to a program stored in the memory 4820. In a multi-processor system, multiple processing units execute computer executable instructions in parallel to improve the parallel processing capability of the electronic device 4800.
  • the electronic device 4800 typically includes a plurality of computer storage media. Such media may be any available media accessible to the electronic device 4800, including but not limited to volatile and nonvolatile media, removable and non-removable media.
  • the memory 4820 may be a volatile memory (e.g., registers, cache, random access memory (RAM)), a nonvolatile memory (e.g., read-only memory (ROM), electrically erasable programmable read-only memory (EEPM), or a combination thereof).
  • the storage device 4830 may be a removable or non-removable medium and may include a machine-readable medium such as a flash drive, a disk, or any other medium that may be capable of storing information and/or data (e.g., training data for training) and may be accessed within the electronic device 4800.
  • a machine-readable medium such as a flash drive, a disk, or any other medium that may be capable of storing information and/or data (e.g., training data for training) and may be accessed within the electronic device 4800.
  • the electronic device 4800 may further include additional removable/non-removable, volatile/non-volatile storage media.
  • a disk drive for reading or writing from a removable, non-volatile disk e.g., a "floppy disk”
  • an optical drive for reading or writing from a removable, non-volatile optical disk may be provided.
  • each drive may be connected to a bus (not shown) by one or more data media interfaces.
  • the memory 4820 may include a computer program product 4825 having one or more program modules configured to perform various methods or actions of various embodiments of the present disclosure.
  • the communication unit 4840 implements communication with other electronic devices through a communication medium. Additionally, the functions of the components of the electronic device 4800 can be implemented with a single computing cluster or multiple computing machines that can communicate through a communication connection. Therefore, the electronic device 4800 can operate in a networked environment using a logical connection with one or more other servers, a network personal computer (PC), or another network node.
  • PC network personal computer
  • Input device 4850 may be one or more input devices, such as a mouse, keyboard, tracking ball, etc.
  • Output device 4860 may be one or more output devices, such as a display, a speaker, a printer, etc.
  • Electronic device 4800 may also communicate with one or more external devices (not shown) through communication unit 4840 as needed, such as storage devices, display devices, etc., communicate with one or more devices that allow a user to interact with electronic device 4800, or communicate with any device that allows electronic device 4800 to communicate with one or more other electronic devices (e.g., a network card, a modem, etc.). Such communication may be performed via an input/output (I/O) interface (not shown).
  • I/O input/output
  • a computer-readable storage medium on which computer-executable instructions are stored, wherein the computer-executable instructions are executed by a processor to implement the method described above.
  • a computer program product is also provided, the computer program product is tangibly stored in a non-transitory computer-readable storage medium.
  • the read medium includes computer executable instructions, and the computer executable instructions are executed by a processor to implement the method described above.
  • These computer-readable program instructions can be provided to a processing unit of a general-purpose computer, a special-purpose computer, or other programmable data processing device, thereby producing a machine, so that when these instructions are executed by the processing unit of the computer or other programmable data processing device, a device that implements the functions/actions specified in one or more boxes in the flowchart and/or block diagram is generated.
  • These computer-readable program instructions can also be stored in a computer-readable storage medium, and these instructions cause the computer, programmable data processing device, and/or other equipment to work in a specific manner, so that the computer-readable medium storing the instructions includes a manufactured product, which includes instructions for implementing various aspects of the functions/actions specified in one or more boxes in the flowchart and/or block diagram.
  • Computer-readable program instructions can be loaded onto a computer, other programmable data processing apparatus, or other device so that a series of operating steps are performed on the computer, other programmable data processing apparatus, or other device to produce a computer-implemented process, so that the instructions executed on the computer, other programmable data processing apparatus, or other device implement the functions/actions specified in one or more boxes in the flowchart and/or block diagram.
  • each box in the flowchart or block diagram may represent a module, a program segment or a portion of an instruction, and a module, a program segment or a portion of an instruction contains one or more executable instructions for implementing a specified logical function.
  • the functions marked in the boxes may also occur in an order different from that marked in the accompanying drawings. For example, two consecutive boxes can actually be executed substantially in parallel, and they may sometimes be executed in the opposite order, depending on the functions involved.
  • each box in the block diagram and/or flowchart, and the combination of boxes in the block diagram and/or flowchart, can be used to perform a specified function or action.
  • the invention may be implemented by a dedicated hardware-based system or by a combination of dedicated hardware and computer instructions.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Theoretical Computer Science (AREA)
  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Artificial Intelligence (AREA)
  • Audiology, Speech & Language Pathology (AREA)
  • Computational Linguistics (AREA)
  • General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • General Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • User Interface Of Digital Computer (AREA)

Abstract

根据本公开的各实施例提供了用于呈现文档的方法、装置、设备和存储介质。该方法包括呈现文档的第一视图，文档包括至少一个内容块，并且至少一个内容块具有呈现属性。该方法进一步包括响应于接收到用于呈现文档的第二视图的指示，调整至少一个内容块的呈现属性。此外，该方法还包括基于经调整的呈现属性，在第二视图中呈现至少一个内容块。以此方式，可以改善文档的用户体验，并且扩展文档的应用场景。

Description

用于呈现文档的方法、装置、设备和存储介质
本申请要求2022年10月31日递交的如下申请的优先权：标题为“用于呈现文档的方法、装置、设备和存储介质”、申请号为202211351337.8的中国发明专利申请；标题为“用于文档演示的方法、装置、设备和存储介质”、申请号为202211351629.1的中国发明专利申请；标题为“文档交互的方法、装置、设备和存储介质”、申请号为202211345566.9的中国发明专利申请；以及标题为“用于文档内容显示的方法、装置、设备和存储介质”、申请号为202211351678.5的中国发明专利申请，上述申请的全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。
技术领域
本公开的各实施例总体上涉及计算机领域，特别地涉及用于呈现文档的方法、装置、设备和计算机可读存储介质、用于文档演示的方法、装置、设备和计算机可读存储介质，文档交互的方法、装置、设备和计算机可读存储介质，以及用于文档内容显示的方法、装置、设备和计算机可读存储介质。
背景技术
随着计算机的日益普及，人们通过计算机来进行办公变得越来越普遍。当前，文档在日常办公中被广泛使用。人们往往以特定的文档格式创建文档，并在该文档格式下编辑和使用文档。然而，文档的不同使用场景对于文档的呈现方式可能有不同的需求。例如，人们可以使用文档编辑工具来编辑用于记录信息的文档，并且使用演示工具来编写用于演示的文档，等等。针对不同的使用场景，人们不得不在多种工具的文档格式之间进行转换。此时，期望能够使同一文档可以适用于不同的使用场景，并且在多种不同的视图中呈现文档。
在人们的生活、工作和社交等多个方面会涉及文档的使用，包括 文档的演示。例如，在会议汇报、企业宣传、产品推介、活动展示等场景中，常常需要对文档的各种内容进行演示。然而，传统的文档演示并不支持观看者与文档的交互。
在文档演示过程中，有些文档中具有一些输入的或插入的内容，这些内容能够对文档的内容进行补充。如何在文档的演示过程中更好地呈现这些输入内容是值得关注的问题。
而且，针对不同的应用场景，需要进行演示的文档内容可能有所不同。如何提供更多样、灵活的文档内容显示，是值得关注的问题。
发明内容
根据本公开的第一方面，提供了一种用于呈现文档的方法。在该方法中，呈现文档的第一视图，文档包括至少一个内容块，并且至少一个内容块具有呈现属性。响应于接收到用于呈现文档的第二视图的指示，调整至少一个内容块的呈现属性。进一步，基于经调整的呈现属性，在第二视图中呈现至少一个内容块。
根据本公开的第二方面，提供了一种用于呈现文档的装置。该装置包括原始呈现模块。该原始呈现模块被配置为：呈现文档的第一视图，文档包括至少一个内容块，至少一个内容块具有呈现属性。该装置进一步包括调整模块，其被配置为响应于接收到用于呈现文档的第二视图的指示，调整至少一个内容块的呈现属性。此外，该装置还包括目标呈现模块，其被配置为基于经调整的呈现属性，在第二视图中呈现至少一个内容块。
根据本公开的第三方面，提供了一种电子设备。该设备包括至少一个处理单元；以及至少一个存储器，至少一个存储器被耦合到至少一个处理单元并且存储用于由至少一个处理单元执行的指令。指令在由至少一个处理单元执行时使设备执行根据本公开的第一方面的方法。
根据本公开的第四方面，提供了一种计算机可读存储介质。该计算机可读存储介质上存储有计算机程序，计算机程序可由处理器执行 以执行根据本公开的第一方面的方法。
在本公开的第一方面，提供了一种文档演示的方法。该方法包括响应于在文档的编辑页面中接收到切换指示，呈现文档的演示页面，该演示页面包括在文档中输入的内容项的视图。该方法还包括响应于检测到对视图的触发指示，在演示页面内呈现内容项。
在本公开的第二方面，提供了一种文档演示的方法。该方法包括响应于接收到对文档中内容项的视图的触发指示，确定文档当前的页面类型。该方法还包括响应于页面类型为编辑页面，跳转到编辑页面之外的页面来呈现内容项。该方法还包括响应于页面类型为演示页面，在演示页面内呈现内容项。
在本公开的第三方面，提供了一种用于文档演示的装置。该装置包括演示页面呈现模块，被配置为响应于在文档的编辑页面中接收到切换指示，呈现文档的演示页面，该演示页面包括在文档中输入的内容项的视图。该装置还包括内容项呈现模块，被配置为响应于检测到对视图的触发指示，在演示页面内呈现内容项。
在本公开的第四方面，提供了一种用于文档演示的装置。该装置包括页面类型确定模块，被配置为响应于接收到对文档中内容项的视图的触发指示，确定文档当前的页面类型。该装置还包括页面跳转模块，被配置为响应于页面类型为编辑页面，跳转到编辑页面之外的页面来呈现内容项。该装置还包括演示页面呈现模块，被配置为响应于页面类型为演示页面，在演示页面内呈现内容项。
在本公开的第五方面，提供了一种电子设备。该设备包括至少一个处理单元；以及至少一个存储器，至少一个存储器被耦合到至少一个处理单元并且存储用于由至少一个处理单元执行的指令。指令在由至少一个处理单元执行时使设备执行第一方面或者第二方面的方法。
在本公开的第六方面，提供了一种计算机可读存储介质。介质上存储有计算机程序，计算机程序可由处理器执行以实现第一方面或者第二方面的方法。
在本公开的第一方面，提供了一种文档交互的方法。该方法包括： 在第一终端设备处，在文档被演示的同时在文档的演示视图中呈现文档的访问路径信息；以及基于至少一个第二终端设备发起的包括访问路径信息的访问请求，将文档的演示视图提供给至少一个第二终端设备。
在本公开的第二方面，提供了一种文档交互的方法。该方法包括：在第二终端设备处，获取文档的访问路径信息，文档在第一终端设备处正被演示；发送针对文档的访问请求，访问请求包括访问路径信息；接收文档的演示视图；以及在演示模式下呈现文档的演示视图。
在本公开的第三方面，提供了一种用于文档交互的第一装置。该装置包括：访问路径呈现模块，被配置为在文档被演示的同时在文档的演示视图中呈现文档的访问路径信息；以及视图提供模块，被配置为基于至少一个第二装置发起的包括访问路径信息的访问请求，将文档发送给至少一个第二装置。
在本公开的第五方面，提供了一种用于文档交互的第二装置。该装置包括：访问获取模块，被配置为获取文档的访问路径信息，文档在第一装置处正被演示；请求发起模块，被配置为发送针对文档的访问请求，访问请求包括访问路径信息；视图接收模块，被配置为接收文档的演示视图；以及视图呈现模块，被配置为在演示模式下呈现文档的演示视图。
在本公开的第六方面，提供了一种电子设备。该电子设备包括至少一个处理单元；以及至少一个存储器，至少一个存储器被耦合到至少一个处理单元并且存储用于由至少一个处理单元执行的指令。指令在由至少一个处理单元执行时使电子设备执行第一方面或第二方面的方法。
在本公开的第七方面，提供了一种计算机可读存储介质。该计算机可读存储介质上存储有计算机程序，计算机程序可由处理器执行以实现第一方面或第二方面的方法。
在本公开的第一方面，提供了一种文档内容的显示的方法。该方法包括在文档的当前视图下，接收对文档内的内容块中的目标内容块 的选择操作，确定目标内容块。该方法还包括在目标内容块被确定时，接收对目标内容块的内容演示指示。该方法还包括基于目标内容块生成包括至少一个内容页面的目标视图。目标内容块的内容显示在至少一个内容页面中。
在本公开的第二方面，提供了一种用于文档内容显示的装置。该装置包括目标内容块确定模块，被配置为在文档的当前视图下，接收对文档内的内容块中的目标内容块的选择操作，确定目标内容块。该装置还包括内容演示指示接收模块，被配置为在目标内容块被确定时，接收对目标内容块的内容演示指示。该装置还包括目标视图生成模块，被配置为基于目标内容块生成包括至少一个内容页面的目标视图。目标内容块的内容显示在至少一个内容页面中。
在本公开的第三方面，提供了一种电子设备。该设备包括至少一个处理单元；以及至少一个存储器，至少一个存储器被耦合到至少一个处理单元并且存储用于由至少一个处理单元执行的指令。指令在由至少一个处理单元执行时使设备执行第一方面的方法。
在本公开的第四方面，提供了一种计算机可读存储介质。介质上存储有计算机程序，计算机程序可由处理器执行以实现第一方面的方法。
应当理解，本内容部分中所描述的内容并非旨在限定本公开的实施例的关键特征或重要特征，也不用于限制本公开的范围。本公开的其他特征将通过以下的描述而变得容易理解。
附图说明
结合附图并参考以下详细说明，本公开各实施例的上述和其他特征、优点及方面将变得更加明显。在附图中，相同或相似的附图标记表示相同或相似的元素，其中：
图1A示出了本公开的各实施例能够在其中实现的示例环境的示意图；
图1B示出了根据本公开的一些实施例的用于呈现文档的方法的 流程图；
图1C示出了根据本公开的一些实施例的文档的文档视图的示意图；
图1D示出了根据本公开的一些实施例的文档的演示视图的示意图；
图1E示出了根据本公开的一些实施例的文档的另一演示视图的示意图；
图1F示出了根据本公开的一些实施例的文档的思维导图视图的示意图；
图1GA和图1GB分别示出了根据本公开的一些实施例的对思维导图进行编辑的示意图；
图1HA和图1HB分别示出了根据本公开的一些实施例的对思维导图进行编辑的示意图；
图1IA和图1IB分别示出了根据本公开的一些实施例的对思维导图进行编辑的示意图；
图1JA和图1JB分别示出了根据本公开的一些实施例的对思维导图进行编辑的示意图；
图1KA和图1KB分别示出了根据本公开的一些实施例的对思维导图进行编辑的示意图；
图1OA和图1OB分别示出了根据本公开的一些实施例的文档的文档视图和思维导图视图的示意图；
图1P示出了根据本公开的一些实施例的用于呈现文档的示例装置的框图；
图2A示出了本公开的实施例能够在其中实现的示例环境的示意图；
图2B示出了根据本公开的一些实施例的用于文档演示的过程的流程图；
图2C示出了根据本公开的一些实施例的在浏览窗口中呈现内容项的示例的示意图；
图2DA至图2DB示出了根据本公开的实施例的用于演示页面的交互示例的示意图；
图2EA至图2EF示出根据本公开的一些实施例的用于文档演示的演示页面的示例的示意图；
图2FA至图2FC示出了根据本公开的实施例的用于编辑内容项的视图的交互示例的示意图；
图2G示出了根据本公开的一些实施例的用于编辑内容项的视图的又一交互示例的示意图；
图2H示出了根据本公开的一些实施例的用于文档演示的另一过程的流程图；
图2I示出了根据本公开的一些实施例的用于文档演示的装置的框图；
图2J示出了根据本公开的一些实施例的用于文档演示的另一装置的框图；
图3A示出了本公开的实施例能够在其中实现的示例环境的示意图；
图3B示出了根据本公开的一些实施例的用于文档交互的信令流的流程图；
图3CA至图3CD示出根据本公开的一些实施例的用于文档交互的页面的交互示例的示意图；
图3DA至图3DH示出了根据本公开的另一些实施例的用于文档交互的页面的交互示例的示意图；
图3E示出了根据本公开的一些实施例的用于文档交互的过程的流程图；
图3F示出了根据本公开的另一些实施例的用于文档交互的过程的流程图；
图3G示出了根据本公开的一些实施例的用于文档交互的第一装置的框图；
图3H示出了根据本公开的一些实施例的用于文档交互的第二装 置的框图；
图4A示出了本公开的实施例能够在其中实现的示例环境的示意图；
图4B示出了根据本公开的一些实施例的用于文档内容显示的过程的流程图；
图4CA至图4CF示出了根据本公开的一些实施例的对文档的目标内容块进行选择的示例的示意图；
图4DA至图4DE示出了根据本公开的实施例的用于对文档的目标内容块进行筛选的交互示例的示意图；
图4E示出了根据本公开的实施例的用于对所选中的文档的目标内容块进行交互的示例的示意图；
图4FA至图4FB示出根据本公开的一些实施例的用于文档内容显示的演示界面的示例的示意图；
图4G示出了根据本公开的一些实施例的用于文档内容显示的装置的框图；以及
图4H示出了能够实施本公开的多个实施例的电子设备的框图。
具体实施方式
下面将参照附图更详细地描述本公开的实施例。虽然附图中示出了本公开的某些实施例，然而应当理解的是，本公开可以通过各种形式来实现，而且不应该被解释为限于这里阐述的实施例，相反，提供这些实施例是为了更加透彻和完整地理解本公开。应当理解的是，本公开的附图及实施例仅用于示例性作用，并非用于限制本公开的保护范围。
在本公开的实施例的描述中，术语“包括”及其类似用语应当理解为开放性包含，即“包括但不限于”。术语“基于”应当理解为“至少部分地基于”。术语“一个实施例”或“该实施例”应当理解为“至少一个实施例”。术语“一些实施例”应当理解为“至少一些实施例”。下文还可能包括其他明确的和隐含的定义。
在本文中使用的术语“响应于”表示相应的事件发生或者条件得以满足的状态。将会理解，响应于该事件或者条件而被执行的后续动作的执行时机，与该事件发生或者条件成立的时间，二者之间未必是强关联的。例如，在某些情况下，后续动作可在事件发生或者条件成立时立即被执行；而在另一些情况下，后续动作可在事件发生或者条件成立后经过一段时间才被执行。
可以理解的是，本技术方案所涉及的数据(包括但不限于数据本身、数据的获取或使用)应当遵循相应法律法规及相关规定的要求。
可以理解的是，在使用本公开各实施例公开的技术方案之前，均应当根据相关法律法规通过适当的方式对本公开所涉及个人信息的类型、使用范围、使用场景等告知用户并获得用户的授权。
例如，在响应于接收到用户的主动请求时，向用户发送提示信息，以明确地提示用户，其请求执行的操作将需要获取和使用到用户的个人信息，从而使得用户可以根据提示信息来自主地选择是否向执行本公开技术方案的操作的电子设备、应用程序、服务器或存储介质等软件或硬件提供个人信息。
作为一种可选的但非限制性的实现方式，响应于接收到用户的主动请求，向用户发送提示信息的方式，例如可以是弹出窗口的方式，弹出窗口中可以以文字的方式呈现提示信息。此外，弹出窗口中还可以承载供用户选择“同意”或“不同意”向电子设备提供个人信息的选择控件。
可以理解的是，上述通知和获取用户授权过程仅是示意性的，不对本公开的实现方式构成限定，其他满足相关法律法规的方式也可应用于本公开的实现方式中。
如前所述，在日常办公中广泛使用文档，并且不同的使用场景往往对于文档的呈现方式具有不用的需求。例如，在演示汇报的场景下，通常期望以分页布局的形式来呈现文档内容，并且对文档内容的样式和排版等具有一定要求。又例如，在梳理思路的场景下，通常期望以诸如树状结构的层级结构来呈现文档内容。常规的文档格式往往只能 满足特定使用场景的需求，例如以幻灯片的方式呈现文档的演示文稿格式适用于演示汇报的场景，思维导图形式的文档适用于梳理思路的场景。此外，在不同格式间转换文档往往是费时且低效的，并且所获得的文档的质量，诸如文档的布局、排版和样式等，也通常不尽如人意。
目前已经提出了为文档生成目录的技术方案，然而目录结构并不适合于用户整理思路进而调整文档内容。另外，目前已经提出了基于文档中的页面分割标识或预先设置的多个单元格来对文档进行分页，以实现文档从编辑视图到演示视图的切换。但是，该方案所获得的演示视图仅仅只是对文档进行了放大和聚焦，而没有考虑在演示模式下的布局、排版和样式等因素，并不能很好地满足用户对于演示场景的需求。因此，期望的是，能够实现同一文档在多种不同视图之间的高质量切换。
根据本公开的各实施例提供了一种改进的文档呈现方案。具体地，代替以流式方式管理文档内容，本公开可以以内容块的方式来管理文档。在该方案中，文档包括具有相应呈现属性的多个内容块。在接收到视图切换的指示后，可以调整相关内容块的呈现属性，并且基于调整后的呈现属性来呈现这些内容块，从而实现文档的视图切换。
通过下文描述将会理解，与已有方案相比，在根据本公开的各实施例中，借助于分别具有呈现属性的至少一个内容块来管理和呈现文档中的内容，可以以更精细的粒度来实现文档在多种不同视图之间的切换，从而可以更好地满足用户对于相应场景的需求。以此方式，可以避免在多种文档格式间转换文档，使得用户可以通过触发相应的视图来切换文档的呈现方式，从而改善了文档的用户体验，并且扩展了文档的应用场景。
以下将参考附图描述本公开的一些示例实施例。图1A示出了本公开的各实施例能够在其中实现的示例环境1100的示意图。在该示例环境1100中，电子设备1110例如可以通过文档呈现界面1120来向用户1102呈现文档1112。在一些实施例中，文档1112可以被存储在电子 设备1110的存储装置中。在另一些实施例中，文档1112可以是在线文档，并且可以被存储在与电子设备1110通信地连接的另一电子设备中，诸如云存储中。本公开的范围在此方面不受限制。
在一些实施例中，文档呈现界面1120例如可以由电子设备1110中的文档编辑应用提供。文档呈现界面1120可以具有适合于电子设备1110的显示区域大小的显示区域面积，或者具有其他适当的预定的或由用户1102指定的显示区域面积。
在一些实施例中，用户1102可以与电子设备1110进行交互。例如，用户1102可以通过与电子设备1110交互，来对文档呈现界面1120中的文档1112进行诸如编辑和呈现等操作。关于用户1102与电子设备1110的各种交互过程将在下文中进行详细描述。
电子设备1110可以是任意类型的移动终端、固定终端或便携式终端，包括移动手机、台式计算机、膝上型计算机、笔记本计算机、上网本计算机、平板计算机、媒体计算机、多媒体平板、个人通信系统(PCS)设备、个人导航设备、个人数字助理(PDA)、音频/视频播放器、数码相机/摄像机、定位设备、电视接收器、无线电广播接收器、电子书设备、游戏设备或者前述各项的任意组合，包括这些设备的配件和外设或者其任意组合。在一些实施例中，电子设备1110也能够支持任意类型的针对用户1102的接口(诸如“可佩戴”电路等)。应当理解，仅出于示例性的目的描述环境1100的结构和功能，而不暗示对于本公开的范围的任何限制。
图1B示出了根据本公开的一些实施例的用于呈现文档1112的方法1200的流程图。在一些实施例中，方法1200可以由如图1A所示的电子设备1110执行。应当理解的是，方法1200还可以包括未示出的附加框和/或可以省略所示出的某个(或者某些)框，本公开的范围在此方面不受限制。
在框1202，呈现文档1112的第一视图。在此，文档1112包括至少一个内容块，并且该至少一个内容块分别具有呈现属性。例如，电子设备1110可以在文档呈现界面1120中呈现文档1112的文档视图作 为第一视图。在本公开的上下文中，术语“内容块”表示文档1112中的实体，该实体包含但不限于以下至少任一项：文本、图像、视频、表格、图形、链接、批注、符号、公式等内容，并且该实体具有呈现属性。示例性地，内容块的呈现属性可以用于控制在文档1112的视图中是否呈现该内容块，并且控制以何种方式在文档1112的视图中呈现该内容块。内容块的呈现属性可以包括但不限于以下至少任一项：层级、宽度、高度、字体、字号、边框、线条、填充以及对齐方式。应当理解的是，呈现属性还可以包括其他任何合适的属性，本公开的范围在此方面不受限制。
下面结合图1C描述以文档视图方式呈现的第一视图，该图1C示出了根据本公开的一些实施例的文档1112的文档视图1300的示意图。应当理解，图1C示出的页面以及下文中将描述的其他附图中的页面仅仅是示例，实际可以存在各种页面设计。页面中的各个图形元素可以具有不同的布置和不同的视觉表示，其中的一个或多个元素可以被省略或被替换，并且还可以存在一个或多个其他元素。本公开的实施例在此方面不受限制。
在图1C中，文档1112示例性地包括十三个内容块，即内容块1310-1至内容块1310-13(单独或统一地被称为内容块1310)，其中内容块1310-1至1310-12是文档类型的内容块，并且内容块1310-13是图像类型的内容块。出于解释说明的目的，仅在图1C中示出了文档1112中的十三个内容块1310。应当理解的是，文档1112可以具有更少的或者更多的内容块1310。虽然在图1C的示例中，文档1112的内容块1310的类型为文本或图像，但在其他实施例中，内容块1310的类型还可以是表格、图形、链接、批注、符号、公式，等等。此外，虽然在附图中呈现了特定的文本，但这样的文本并不构成对本公开的实施例的任何限制。
示例性地，图1C中的内容块1310-1的呈现属性及其配置为：字体是黑体，字号是三号，层级是文档标题。内容块1310-3、内容块1310-5、内容块1310-7和内容块1310-11的呈现属性及其配置为：字 体是黑体，字号是小三，层级是一级标题。内容块1310-9的呈现属性及其配置为：字体是黑体，字号是四号，层级是二级标题。内容块1310-2、内容块1310-4、内容块1310-6、内容块1310-8、内容块1310-10和内容块1310-12的呈现属性及其配置为：字体是楷体，字号是四号，层级是正文。
在图1C中，在文档视图300的右上角示例性地示出了用于控制视图切换的三个视图控件1320，即视图控件1320-1、视图控件1320-2和视图控件1320-3(单独或统一地被称为视图控件1320)。视图控件1320-1对应于思维导图类型的视图，视图控件1320-2对应于流式类型的视图，并且视图控件1320-3对应于演示类型的视图。在本公开的上下文中，思维导图类型的视图也可以被称为思维导图视图，流式类型的视图也可以被称为文档视图，并且演示类型的视图也可以被称为演示视图。在图1C的示例中，文档视图1300被呈现，因此视图控件1320-2呈现激活状态，而视图控件1320-1和视图控件1320-3呈现未激活状态。应当理解的是，图1C中示出的视图控件1320仅是示意性的，还可以以其他任何合适的方式(例如，用户可以按下预定快捷键、或者执行预定手势)来控制视图切换，本公开的范围在此方面不受限制。
在一些实施例中，可以在第一视图和第二视图之间切换文档的呈现方式。应当理解的是，第一视图可以是文档视图、演示视图或思维导图视图中的任一种视图，并且第二视图可以是文档视图、演示视图或思维导图视图中与第一视图不同的另一视图。出于说明的目的，在下文中将以第一视图为文档视图，并且第二视图为演示视图或思维导图视图为例来描述本公开的各实施例。此外，根据本公开的各实施例的方案还可以应用于其他任何合适类型的视图，本公开的范围在此方面不受限制。
返回图1B，在框1204，响应于接收到用于呈现文档1112的第二视图的指示，调整至少一个内容块的呈现属性。在一些实施例中，该指示可以是用户1102对视图控件1320的特定操作，诸如鼠标单击、鼠标双击、鼠标框选、鼠标悬浮、手指或者触控笔触摸、手指或者触 控笔按压，等等。继续参考图1C描述有关指示的更多细节，在图1C所示的示例中，用户1102可以通过控制鼠标箭头1330单击视图控件1320-3来指示切换到演示视图。
在一些实施例中，电子设备1110可以基于用于呈现文档1112的第二视图的指示，确定第二视图的类型，并且基于第二视图的类型，调整至少一个内容块1310的呈现属性。参考图1C，如果接收到用户1102对视图控件1320-3的触发指示，电子设备1110可以基于该指示，确定用户1102单击了视图控件1320-3，并且根据视图控件1320-3对应于演示视图，确定待呈现的第二视图类型指示演示类型。
在一些实施例中，如果确定第二视图的类型为演示类型，电子设备1110可以调整至少一个内容块1310在第二视图中的位置、尺寸和/或显示内容。在下文中结合图1D进行描述，图1D示出了根据本公开的一些实施例的文档1112的演示视图1400的示意图。为了便于示出，图1D示仅意性地示出了文档1112在演示视图下的前三页，即页1410-1，页1410-2和页1410-3。参考图1D，内容块1310-1的位置在演示视图中被调整为位于第一页1410-1的底部居中。电子设备1110还将内容块1310-1的字体调整为隶书，并且根据窗口尺寸将字号调整为一号，等等。
此外，电子设备1110还可以将图片类型的内容块1310-13的尺寸调大，以作为第一页1410-1的背景。尽管未示出，在另一个示例中，电子设备1110还可以例如借助于机器翻译生成与标题“动物”相对应的英文表述“Animal”，并且将内容块1310-1在演示视图中的显示内容调整为“动物Animal”。通过这种方式，可以有效地将文档1112中的各个内容块1310适配于演示视图的呈现形式，并且自动化地提供一种演示视图的较为美观的设计，从而可以减轻用户1102设计演示文档的工作量，改善用户体验。
在一些备选的或附加的实施例中，如果确定第二视图的类型包括演示类型，电子设备1110还可以调整至少一个内容块1310的组合布局方式。在一个示例中，如果确定至少一个内容块1310包括第一类型 的内容块和第二类型的内容块，电子设备1110可以将第一类型的内容块与第二类型的内容块进行组合布局。在图1D中，电子设备1110可以通过调整图片类型的内容块1310-13的位置和尺寸，将其设置为文本类型的内容块1310-1的背景。在图1D的示例中，内容块1310-1例如可以对应于第一类型的内容块，并且内容块1310-13例如可以对应于第二类型的内容块。应当理解的是，上述对应关系仅是示意性的，并不构成对本公开的实施例的任何限制。通过这种组合布局方式，可以借助于文档1112中不同类型的内容块1310的搭配来美化所生成的演示视图，以提高演示文档的美观度。
在另一个示例中，如果确定至少一个内容块1310包括属于同一个父级内容块的多个内容块1310，电子设备1110可以将多个内容块1310进行组合布局。返回到参考图1C，由于内容块1310-3和内容块1310-5具有相同的父级内容块1310-1，因此电子设备1110可以将这两个内容块进行组合布局。参考图1D，电子设备1110在第三页1410-3中将内容块1310-3和内容块1310-5以左右组合布局的形式进行呈现。通过这种组合布局方式，可以充分挖掘并利用文档1112中内容块1310之间的层级关系来美化所生成的演示视图，以提高演示文档的美观度。
在又一个示例中，如果确定至少一个内容块1310包括多个相同类型的内容块1310，电子设备1110可以将多个相同类型的内容块1310进行组合布局。在图1D的第三页1410-3中，电子设备1110除了将内容块1310-3和内容块1310-5以左右布局的形式进行呈现，还将同样是文本类型的内容块1310-4和1310-6进行组合，并且与内容块1310-3和内容块1310-5组合进行呈现。通过这种组合布局方式，可以充分利用文档1112中相同类型的内容块1310来构造所生成的演示视图，以提高演示文档的美观度。
在再一个示例中，如果确定至少一个内容块1310包括多个相同类型的内容块1310，并且多个相同类型的内容块1310的内容满足预设条件，电子设备1110可以将多个相同类型的内容块1310进行组合布局。预设条件的示例包括但不限于多个内容块1310的内容语义相似、 或者多个内容块1310的篇幅相近，本公开的范围在此方面不受限制。在图1D中，由于文档1112类型的内容块1310-4和内容块1310-6的篇幅长度差异小于预定阈值，即篇幅相近，因此电子设备1110可以以左右布局的方式来呈现内容块1310-4和内容块1310-6。通过这种组合布局方式，可以充分利用文档1112中相同类型的内容块1310之间的关联性来设计所生成的演示视图，以提高演示文档的美观度。
在一些实施例中，在待呈现的第二视图是演示视图的情况下，电子设备1110还可以在演示视图中呈现用于调整分页的分页控制元素。图1D中以箭头形式示例性地示出了两个分页控制元素1420-1和1420-2(单独或统一地被称为分页控制元素1420)。应当理解的是，分页控制元素1420还可以以其他任何合适的形式被呈现，本公开的范围在此方面不受限制。
如果接收到对在演示视图中呈现的分页控制元素1420的调整，电子设备1110可以调整演示视图的分页。示例性地，在图1D中，用户1102可以将分页控制元素1420-2向下移动至内容块1310-3与内容块1310-4之间的水平位置。响应于接收到对分页控制元素1420-2的上述调整，电子设备1110可以调整图1D中所示的分页布局。所得到的新的演示视图在图1E中示出。如图1E中所示，内容块1310-3和内容块1310-5在演示视图1500的第二页1510-2中被呈现，而内容块1310-4和内容块1310-6在演示视图1500的第三页1510-3中被呈现。通过这种方式，使得用户1102可以方便地调整演示视图中的分页布局，从而便于用户随时以更为精细的粒度调整分页布局方式进而提高用户体验。
在一些实施例中，电子设备1110还可以在演示视图中呈现可见性控制元素，例如，可以在鼠标悬停于内容块时呈现(未示出)。如果接收到对在演示视图中呈现的可见性控制元素的调整，电子设备1110可以调整至少一个内容块1310的可见性。例如，电子设备1110可以通过改变内容块1310的透明度来调整可见性。通过这种方式，使得用户1102可以方便地在演示视图中的隐藏或淡化某个或者某些内容块 1310，从而提高演示文档的简洁性和美观度。
在一些实施例中，电子设备1110还可以在演示视图中呈现评论控制元素，例如，可以在鼠标悬停于内容块时呈现(未示出)。如果接收到对在演示视图中呈现的评论控制元素的调整，电子设备1110可以调整针对至少一个内容块1310的评论。例如电子设备1110可以将用于一个内容块1310的评论控制元素中所获取的所有评论呈现在演示文档作者的用户界面中。通过这种方式，使得演示文档的多个观看者都可以同时对该演示文档进行评论，并能及时将所有评论反馈给演示文档的作者，从而提高用户体验。
在一些实施例中，电子设备1110还可以在演示视图中呈现颜色控制元素，例如，可以在鼠标悬停于内容块时呈现(未示出)。如果接收到对在演示视图中呈现的颜色控制元素的调整，电子设备1110可以调整针对至少一个内容块1310的颜色。例如，用户1102可以通过调整颜色控制元素来改变内容块1310-1中的文本内容“动物”的颜色。通过这种方式，使得用户1102可以方便地在演示视图中改变各内容块1310的颜色，从而提高演示文档的美观度。
在一些实施例中，电子设备1110还可以基于至少一个内容块1310的文字内容向至少一个内容块1310指定图标，并且在至少一个内容块1310相关联的位置处呈现图标。示例性地，对于内容块1310-3，电子设备1110可以在文字“哺乳动物”旁边呈现例如狮子、老虎等哺乳动物的图标；对于内容块1310-5，电子设备1110可以在文字“爬行动物”旁边呈现例如鳄鱼等爬行动物的图标；等等。又例如，在介绍工作进度的文档中，如果确定内容块1310的文字内容为“时间安排”，则电子设备1110可以在演示视图中在该内容块1310旁边呈现时钟图标。又例如，如果确定内容块1310的文字内容为“安全”，则电子设备1110可以在演示视图中在该内容块1310旁边呈现盾牌图标。通过这种方式，可以智能地提供图形化的视觉呈现效果，使得用户1102在生成演示文档的过程中不需要手动选择图标，从而进一步丰富演示文档的内容多样性，并且改善了用户体验。
通过以上结合图1C至图1E的描述可以看到，根据本公开的各实施例的用于呈现文档1112的方法可以自动地完成对演示视图中的布局、排版和样式的选择，并且基于内容块1310可以以更精细的粒度来调整文档1112中内容的显示方式，从而可以提升文档1112在演示视图中的美观程度，并且改善了用户体验。
返回参考图1C，在图1C所示的示例中，用户1102可以通过控制鼠标箭头1330单击视图控件1320-1来指示切换到思维导图视图。应当理解的是，本文中所采用的指示的形式在此方面不受限制。
在一些实施例中，如果确定第二视图的类型为思维导图类型，电子设备1110可以确定至少一个内容块1310在文档视图中的标题层级。为了描述简洁方便起见，在本文也可能将“标题层级”简称为“层级”。例如，电子设备1110可以根据各个内容块1310的呈现属性确定：内容块1310-1的层级是文档标题；内容块1310-3、内容块1310-5、内容块1310-7和内容块1310-11的层级是一级标题；内容块1310-9的层级是二级标题；内容块1310-2、内容块1310-4、内容块1310-6、内容块1310-8、内容块1310-10、内容块1310-12和内容块1310-13的层级是正文。
电子设备1110可以基于标题层级调整至少一个内容块的呈现属性，并且在思维导图视图中以调整后的呈现属性显示至少一个内容块。在一些实施例中，电子设备可以在创建的思维导图中呈现满足预定层级条件的内容块1310。示例性地，呈现属性还可以包括指示内容块1310在思维导图中是否被呈现的思维导图显示属性。电子设备1110可以基于内容块1310的层级是否满足预定层级条件来设置内容块1310的思维导图显示属性。
为了便于描述，在下文中以预定层级条件是层级不低于一级标题为例进行说明。由于文档标题在层级上高于一级标题，而二级标题和正文在层级上低于一级标题，因此电子设备1110可以基于预定层级条件，确定需要在思维导图中呈现：层级为文档标题的内容块1310和层级为一级标题的内容块1310。在图1C的示例中，电子设备1110可以 将内容块1310-1、内容块1310-3、内容块1310-5、内容块1310-7和内容块1310-11的思维导图显示属性设置为：在思维导图中呈现相应内容块1310。另外，电子设备1110可以将内容块1310-2、内容块1310-4、内容块1310-6、内容块1310-8、内容块1310-9、内容块1310-10、内容块1310-12和内容块1310-13的思维导图显示属性设置为：在思维导图中不呈现上述内容块1310。
应当理解的是，上述基于思维导图显示属性的方案仅是示例性的，电子设备1110还可以调整内容块1310的其他任何合适的呈现属性，本公开的范围在此方面不受限制。
返回到参考图1B，在框1206，基于经调整的呈现属性，在第二视图中呈现至少一个内容块。针对第二视图是思维导图视图的情况，电子设备1110可以基于在思维导图中待呈现的内容块1310生成与内容块1310相对应的节点，并且基于内容块1310的标题层级确定各个节点在思维导图中的层级结构，从而基于该层级结构来在思维导图中呈现各个节点。以此方式，可以在不改变文档内容本身的情况下切换文档1112的显示方式，而且无需转换文档格式。因此，可以便于用户在思维导图视图中整理思路，从而更高效地编辑文档结构。
在下文中，以思维导图视图作为第二视图的示例描述更多相关细节。图1F示出了根据本公开的一些实施例的文档1112的思维导图视图1600的示意图。图1F中的思维导图1610包括五个节点，即节点1620-1至1620-5(单独或统一地被称为节点1620)。下面将对比图1C和图1F来进行描述。
电子设备1110可以根据内容块1310-1至1310-13的呈现属性中的思维导图显示属性来确定：需要在思维导图1610中呈现内容块1310-1、内容块1310-3、内容块1310-5、内容块1310-7和内容块1310-11。电子设备1110可以分别基于上述内容块1310来生成相应的节点1620。例如，图1F中的节点1620-1对应于内容块1310-1，节点1620-2对应于内容块1310-3，节点1620-3对应于内容块1310-5，节点1620-4对应于内容块1310-7，并且节点1620-5对应于内容块1310-11。
电子设备1110可以基于内容块1310的层级来确定各节点1620在思维导图1610中的层级结构。在一些实施例中，电子设备1110可以将文档标题设置为思维导图1610的根节点，并且将一级标题设置为一级节点，将二级标题设置为二级节点，依次类推。参考图1C和图1F的示例，基于内容块1310-1的层级为文档标题，电子设备1110可以确定相应的节点1620-1为根节点。基于内容块1310-3的层级为一级标题，电子设备1110可以确定相应的节点1620-2为一级节点。类似地，电子设备1110可以确定节点1620-3、节点1620-4和节点1620-5为一级节点。由于上文提及的预定层级条件为层级不低于一级标题，因此图1F的思维导图1610包括一个根节点和四个一级节点。
电子设备1110可以基于所确定的节点1620的层级结构，在思维导图1610中呈现各个节点1620。示例性地，在图1F中以树状布局呈现节点1620-1至1620-5。尽管图1F仅示出了两层树状布局，当文档1112包括更多层级时，基于合适的预定层级条件，该树状布局还可以具有更多层级。例如，在节点1620-2下层还可以包括哺乳动物的更多分类，等等。应当理解的是，电子设备1110还可以以任何其他合适的布局方式来呈现各个节点1620，本公开的范围在此方面不受限制。
在一些实施例中，思维导图1610以独立页面呈现文档1112的层次结构，并且允许用户1102基于思维导图1610来梳理编辑文档1112的思路。例如，用户1102可以在思维导图1610中调整各个内容块的层级、内容和顺序，等等。通过在独立页面中呈现思维导图1610，可以使用户1102专注于对文档1112的结构和撰写思路的梳理，而不必被其他暂时不重要的细节内容(例如，较低层级中的内容)所分心。与在文档1112的特定视图中的部分区域内呈现文档目录的已有方案相比，可以为用户1102提供沉浸式专注于梳理思路的可能性，从而进一步改善了用户体验，并且提高了用户1102编辑文档1112的效率。
具体地，响应于检测到针对思维导图视图中的节点1620的编辑操作，电子设备1110可以对思维导图视图中的与节点1620对应的内容块1310进行相应更新。在一个示例中，如果确定编辑操作调整节点的 内容，电子设备1110可以调整与该节点相对应的内容块的内容。图1GA和图1GB分别示出了根据本公开的一些实施例的对思维导图1610进行编辑的示意图。如在图1GA的思维导图视图1700A中示出的，用户1102可以调整节点1620-4的内容，例如通过在节点1620-4中添加“水陆”二字，将节点620-4的内容编辑为“水陆两栖动物”。响应于确定该编辑操作，电子设备1110可以相应地调整与节点1620-4相对应的内容块1310-7的内容。如在图1GB的文档视图1700B中示出的，电子设备1110可以将内容块1310-7的内容同步地调整为“水陆两栖动物”。在图1GA和图1GB的示例中，仅以图1GA中的节点1620-4作为被调整节点的示例，此时图1GB中的内容块1310-7可以是对应于被调整节点的内容块。应当理解的是，上述对应关系仅是示意性的，并不构成对本公开的实施例的任何限制。
通过这种方式，可以使得用户1102能够在思维导图1610中梳理文档1112的思路，并且可以将用户1102的编辑操作同步到文档1112的相应内容块1310中的内容，从而使得用户1102后续可以直接切换到文档1112的其他视图中进一步充实文档1112的细节。因此，可以提高用户1102编辑文档1112的效率，并且改善用户体验。
在又一个示例中，如果确定编辑操作调整两个节点在思维导图1610中的顺序，电子设备1110可以调整与这两个节点相对应的两个内容块在文档1112中的顺序。图1HA和图1HB分别示出了根据本公开的一些实施例的对思维导图1610进行编辑的示意图。如在图1HA的思维导图视图1800A中示出的，用户1102可以调整节点1620-2和节点1620-3的顺序，例如将节点1620-2和节点1620-3的顺序进行了互换，使得节点1620-3位于节点1620-2之前。响应于确定对节点顺序的该编辑操作，电子设备1110可以相应地调整与节点1620-2相对应的内容块1310-3和与节点1620-3相对应的内容块1310-5的顺序。
附加地，可以相应地改变被调整节点的下级内容块的位置。例如，电子设备1110还可以相应地调整与内容块1310-3相关联的内容块1310-4和与内容块1310-5相关联的内容块1310-6的顺序。如在图1HB 的文档视图1800B中示出的，电子设备1110可以将内容块1310-5和内容块1310-6移动至内容块1310-3和内容块1310-4之前。在图1HA和图1HB的示例中，图1HA中的节点1620-2和节点1620-3例如可以分别对应于两个被调整节点，并且图1HB中的内容块1310-3和内容块1310-5例如可以分别对应于与两个被调整节点相对应的两个内容块。应当理解的是，上述对应关系仅是示意性的，并不构成对本公开的实施例的任何限制。
通过这种方式，可以使得用户1102能够在思维导图1610中梳理文档1112的思路，并且可以将用户1102的编辑操作同步到文档1112的相应内容块1310中的相应内容，从而使得用户1102在思维导图1610中对文档1112思路的调整同步到文档1112的其他视图中。因此，可以提高用户1102编辑文档1112的效率，并且改善用户体验。
在再一个示例中，如果确定编辑操作调整节点在思维导图1610中的层级，电子设备1110可以调整内容块在文档1112中的层级。图1IA和图1IB分别示出了根据本公开的一些实施例的对思维导图1610进行编辑的示意图。如在图1IA的思维导图视图1900A中示出的，用户1102可以调整节点1620-1的层级，例如将节点1620-1的层级从根节点调整为一级节点。响应于确定对节点层级的该编辑操作，电子设备1110可以相应地调整与节点1620-1相对应的内容块1310-1的层级。如在图1IB的文档视图1900B中示出的，电子设备1110可以将内容块1310-1的层级调整为一级标题。附加地，电子设备1110可以将内容块1310-1的其他呈现属性，诸如字体和字号，相应地调整为与一级标题相对应的配置。在图1IA和图1IB的示例中，图1IA中的节点1620-1例如可以对应于被调整节点，并且图1IB中的内容块1310-1及其层级属性例如可以对应于被调整节点的相应内容块和相应层级。应当理解的是，上述对应关系仅是示意性的，并不构成对本公开的实施例的任何限制。
通过这种方式，可以使得用户1102能够在思维导图1610中梳理文档1112的思路，并且将用户1102的编辑操作同步到文档1112的相 应内容块1310中的相应内容，从而使得用户1102在思维导图1610中对文档1112思路的调整同步到文档1112的其他视图中。因此，可以提高用户1102编辑文档1112的效率，并且改善用户体验。
在再一个示例中，如果确定编辑操作向思维导图1610中插入新的节点，电子设备1110可以向文档1112中插入与该新节点相对应的新内容块。在一些实施例中，电子设备1110可以基于插入节点的层级来确定新内容块的层级。图1JA和图1JB分别示出了根据本公开的一些实施例的对思维导图1610进行编辑的示意图。如在图1JA的思维导图视图11000A中示出的，用户1102在思维导图1610中插入了一个节点1620-6。节点1620-6是根节点1620-1的子节点。
响应于确定该插入操作，电子设备1110可以相应地在文档1112中插入与该节点相对应的内容块。基于节点1620-6是根节点1620-1的子节点，电子设备1110可以确定新内容块的层级低于与根节点1620-1相对应的内容块1310-1的层级。如在图1JB的文档视图11000B中示出的，电子设备1110可以在文档1112中插入内容块1310-14，该内容块1310-14的层级为一级标题。在图1JA和图1JB的示例中，图1JA中的节点1620-6例如可以对应于被插入的新节点，并且图1JB中的内容块1310-14例如可以对应于新节点的相应内容块。应当理解的是，上述对应关系仅是示意性的，并不构成对本公开的实施例的任何限制。
通过这种方式，可以使得用户1102能够在思维导图1610中梳理文档1112的思路，并且将用户1102的编辑操作同步到文档1112的相应内容块1310中的相应内容，从而使得用户1102在思维导图1610中对文档1112思路的调整同步到文档1112的其他视图中。因此，可以提高用户1102编辑文档1112的效率，并且改善用户体验。
在再一个示例中，如果确定编辑操作从思维导图1610中删除某个节点，电子设备1110可以从文档1112中删除相对应的内容块。图1KA和图1KB分别示出了根据本公开的一些实施例的对思维导图1610进行编辑的示意图。如在图1KA的思维导图视图11100A中示出的，用 户1102在思维导图1610中删除了节点1620-5。响应于确定该删除操作，电子设备1110可以相应地删除与节点1620-5相对应的内容块1310-11，如在图1KB的文档视图11100B中示出的。附加地，电子设备1110可以相应地删除与内容块1310-11相关联的内容块1310-12。出于说明的目的，在图1KA和图1KB中，被删除的元素以浅色示出。在图1KA和图1KB的示例中，图1KA中的节点1620-5例如可以对应于被删除节点，并且图1KB中的内容块1310-11例如可以对应于被删除节点的内容块。应当理解的是，上述对应关系仅是示意性的，并不构成对本公开的实施例的任何限制。
通过这种方式，可以使得用户1102能够在思维导图1610中梳理文档1112的思路，并且将用户1102的编辑操作同步到文档1112的相应内容块1310中的相应内容，从而使得用户1102在思维导图1610中对文档1112思路的调整同步到文档1112的其他视图中。因此，可以提高用户1102编辑文档1112的效率，并且改善用户体验。
将会理解，尽管上文示意性示出了文档1112中的各个标题层级的内容块1310按顺序排列的情况。在某些情况下，这些内容块1310的层级可以是乱序的。这将在下文中参考图1OA和图1OB进一步详细描述。图1OA和图1OB分别示出了根据本公开的一些实施例的文档1112的文档视图11200A和思维导图视图11200B的示意图。为了便于说明的目的，图1OA和图1OB的文档1112中的示例性内容不同于图1C至图1KB的文档1112的内容。图1OA中的文档1112包括六个内容块11210-1至11210-6，其中内容块11210-1的层级为文档标题，内容块11210-2的层级为四级标题，内容块11210-3的层级为三级标题，内容块11210-4的层级为三级标题，内容块11210-5的层级为一级标题，内容块11210-6的层级为二级标题。可以看到，在图1OA的示例中，各个内容块的层级是乱序的，例如四级标题之前并未出现一级标题至三级标题。
在图1OA所示的情况下，电子设备在确定思维导图中的层级结构时不仅考虑内容块的层级，而且会考虑内容块的位置。示例性地，电 子设备从上向下遍历文档1112中的各个内容块。首先，从最上方的内容块11210-1开始，基于内容块11210-1的层级为文档标题，电子设备在思维导图11220中生成与内容块11210-1相对应的节点11230-1作为根节点。随后，遇到位于内容块11210-1之后的内容块11210-2，电子设备可以比较内容块11210-2与内容块11210-1的层级。由于内容块11210-2的层级为四级标题，而内容块11210-1的层级为文档标题，因此内容块11210-2的层级低于内容块11210-1的层级。响应于确定内容块11210-2的层级低于内容块11210-1的层级，电子设备可以将与内容块11210-2相对应的节点11230-2设置为与内容块11210-1相对应的节点11230-1的子节点，如图1OB中的思维导图11220所示的。
随后，在遍历过程中遇到位于内容块11210-2之后的内容块11210-3，电子设备可以比较前后相继的内容块11210-3与内容块11210-2的层级。由于内容块11210-3的层级为三级标题，而内容块11210-2的层级为四级标题，因此内容块11210-3的层级高于内容块11210-2的层级。响应于确定内容块11210-3的层级高于内容块11210-2的层级，电子设备可以回溯到与内容块11210-2相对应的节点11230-2的父节点，即节点11230-1。由于与节点11230-1相对应的内容块11210-1的层级为文档标题，因此内容块11210-3的层级低于内容块11210-1的层级。响应于确定内容块11210-3的层级低于内容块11210-1的层级，电子设备可以将与内容块11210-3相对应的节点11230-3设置为与内容块11210-1相对应的节点11230-1的子节点。
如图1OA和图10B中所示的，虽然内容块11210-2在层级上低于内容块11210-3，但是在思维导图11220中，与这两个内容块相对应的节点11230-2和11230-3具有相同的层级，即都是根节点11230-1的子节点。以此方式，与已有的目录结构相比，可以更直接地体现各个标题之间的从属关系，避免了思维导图11220中的不必要的层级跳跃，从而可以改善用户体验，提高用户1102梳理思路的效率。
返回到参考图1OA，电子设备继续遍历，在遍历过程中遇到位于内容块11210-3之后的内容块11210-4，电子设备可以比较内容块 11210-4与内容块11210-3的层级。由于内容块11210-4的层级为三级标题，而内容块11210-3的层级同样为三级标题，因此内容块11210-4的层级等于内容块11210-3的层级。响应于确定内容块11210-4的层级等于内容块11210-3的层级，电子设备可以将与内容块11210-4相对应的节点11230-4设置为与内容块11210-3相对应的节点11230-3的兄弟节点，即节点11230-4同样被设置为节点11230-1的子节点。类似地，电子设备可以确定与内容块11210-5对应的节点11230-5是节点11230-1的子节点，并且与内容块11210-6对应的节点1610-12是节点11230-5的子节点。
通过上述规则，可以在标题层级乱序的情况下高效地生成对应的思维导图，并且与已有的目录结构相比，可以更直接地体现各个标题直接的从属关系，避免了思维导图中的不必要的层级跳跃，从而可以改善用户体验，提高用户1102梳理思路的效率。
在一些实施例中，空白的文档1112也可以转换到思维导图视图。在空白的思维导图中，用户1102插入的根节点对应于具有文档标题层级的内容块，用户1102插入的一级节点对应于具有一级标题层级的内容块，用户1102插入的二级节点对应于具有二级标题层级的内容块，依次类推。
通过以上结合图1A至图1OB的描述可以看到，在根据本公开的各实施例的用于呈现文档的方法中，通过借助于分别具有呈现属性的多个内容块来管理和呈现文档中的内容，可以以更精细的粒度来实现文档的多种不同视图的切换，从而可以更好地满足用户对于相应场景的需求。以此方式，可以避免在多种文档格式间转换文档，使得用户可以通过触发相应的视图来切换文档的呈现方式，从而改善了文档的用户体验，并且扩展了文档的应用场景。
在上文中已经参考图1A至图1OB详细描述了根据本公开的方法的示例实现，在下文中将参考图1P描述相应的装置的实现。
图1P示出了根据本公开的一些实施例的用于呈现文档的示例装置11300的框图。该装置11300例如可以用于实现如图1A所示的电 子设备1110。装置11300可以包括原始呈现模块11302。该原始呈现模块11302被配置为：呈现文档的第一视图，文档包括至少一个内容块，至少一个内容块具有呈现属性。装置11300还可以包括调整模块11304，其被配置为响应于接收到用于呈现文档的第二视图的指示，调整至少一个内容块的呈现属性。此外，装置11300还可以包括目标呈现模块11306，其被配置为基于经调整的呈现属性，在第二视图中呈现至少一个内容块。
在一些实施例中，调整模块11304包括：类型确定模块，被配置为基于指示，确定第二视图的类型；以及属性调整模块，被配置为基于第二视图的类型，调整呈现属性。
在一些实施例中，属性调整模块包括显示调整模块，其被配置为响应于确定第二视图的类型包括演示类型，调整以下至少任一项：至少一个内容块在第二视图中的位置；至少一个内容块在第二视图中的尺寸；至少一个内容块在第二视图中的显示内容；至少一个内容块的组合布局方式。
在一些实施例中，装置11300还包括以下至少一项：分页调整模块，被配置为响应于接收到对在第二视图中呈现的分页控制元素的调整，调整第二视图的分页；可见性调整模块，被配置为响应于接收到对在第二视图中呈现的可见性控制元素的调整，调整至少一个内容块的可见性；评论调整模块，被配置为响应于接收到对在第二视图中呈现的评论控制元素的调整，调整针对至少一个内容块的评论；颜色调整模块，被配置为响应于接收到对在第二视图中呈现的颜色控制元素的调整，调整针对至少一个内容块的颜色。
在一些实施例中，属性调整模块包括：层级确定模块，被配置为响应于确定第二视图的类型包括思维导图类型，确定至少一个内容块在第一视图中的标题层级；以及思维导图呈现模块，被配置为基于标题层级调整至少一个内容块的呈现属性，在思维导图视图中以呈现属性显示至少一个内容块。
装置11300中所包括的模块和/或单元可以利用各种方式来实现， 包括软件、硬件、固件或其任意组合。在一些实施例中，一个或多个单元可以使用软件和/或固件来实现，例如存储在存储介质上的机器可执行指令。除了机器可执行指令之外或者作为替代，装置11300中的部分或者全部单元可以至少部分地由一个或多个硬件逻辑组件来实现。作为示例而非限制，可以使用的示范类型的硬件逻辑组件包括现场可编程门阵列(FPGA)、专用集成电路(ASIC)、专用标准品(ASSP)、片上系统(SOC)、复杂可编程逻辑器件(CPLD)，等等。
图1P中所示的这些模块和/或单元可以部分或者全部地实现为硬件模块、软件模块、固件模块或者其任意组合。特别地，在某些实施例中，上文描述的流程、方法或过程可以由存储系统或与存储系统对应的主机或独立于存储系统的其他计算设备中的硬件来实现。
如前所述，文档演示遍布在人们的生活、工作和社交等各个方面，例如，会议汇报、企业宣传、产品推介、活动展示等领域。要被进行演示的文档中常常具有一些输入的或插入的内容，这些输入内容能够对文档的内容进行补充。在文档演示过程中，通常需要对这些输入内容进行呈现。例如，可能需要将正在演示的文档中的输入内容(诸如插入的网页链接或者插入的文档)进行呈现。一种对输入内容的常规呈现方案是由用户点击该输入内容，响应于该用户点击，跳转到与该输入内容对应的另外的应用页面来打开该输入内容进行呈现。例如，响应于用户点击插入的网页链接，跳转到网页浏览器以打开该网页并且呈现该网页的内容。
这种常规的输入内容呈现方案会在文档演示过程中产生很多跳转。这种跳转呈现的路径和演示的边界感很强，来回的跳转和切换会破坏观众对内容的沉浸体验。因此，希望能够避免文档演示过程中的跳转，从而提高用户体验。另一方面，有些输入内容在演示时可能有被深度阅读的场景。如何解决内容深度阅读的透传的程度和演示时排版美观程度的冲突，也是值得关注的问题。
根据本公开的实施例，提出了一种改进的文档演示的方案。在该方案中，在文档的演示页面中呈现文档中输入的内容项的视图。在检 测到对该输入的内容项的视图的触发指示后，在演示页面内呈现该输入的内容项，而无需跳转到该内容项对应的应用页面。
该方案能够支持通过检测对输入的内容项的视图的触发指示来在演示页面中呈现该内容项。以此方式，能够避免跳转到演示页面之外的与该内容项对应的页面来显示该内容项。通过这样，可以使用户通过触发输入的内容项的视图来直接查看内容项，而无需跳转，从而改善了文档演示的用户体验。
图2A示出了本公开的实施例能够在其中实现的示例环境2100的示意图。在该示例环境2100中，电子设备2110可以对文档2112进行演示，以呈现文档2112的演示页面2120。在本文中，文档2112可以是任意适于演示的文档格式，例如word文档、ppt文档、pdf文档，等等。
该演示页面2120中呈现有文档2112中输入的或插入的内容项的视图2124(在下文中，简称为视图2124)，以及可能还包括文档2112中的其他内容。该演示页面2120可以由电子设备2110中的例如文档编辑应用或者文档演示应用提供。演示页面2120可以具有适合于电子设备2110的显示区域大小的显示区域面积，或者具有其他适当的预定的或由用户指定的显示区域面积。
在一些实施例中，用户2102可以与电子设备2110进行交互，以选择或者修改演示页面2120中呈现的内容。例如，用户2102可以输入对视图124的触发指示，以使演示页面2120中呈现与该视图2124相关联的输入的或插入的内容项的内容。
在本文中，输入的内容项可以是插入的文件或者插入的文件链接，例如，输入的内容项可以是图片、表格、word文件、演示文稿、多媒体文件(例如，音频或视频)、文件链接(例如，http链接或者ftp链接)，等等。该输入的内容项可以预先存储在电子设备2110的存储装置中。备选地或附加地，该输入的内容项也可以存储在网络位置中或者云存储设备中。本公开的实施例在此方面不受限制。
电子设备2110可以是任意类型的移动终端、固定终端或便携式终 端，包括移动手机、台式计算机、膝上型计算机、笔记本计算机、上网本计算机、平板计算机、媒体计算机、多媒体平板、个人通信系统(PCS)设备、个人导航设备、个人数字助理(PDA)、音频/视频播放器、数码相机/摄像机、定位设备、电视接收器、无线电广播接收器、电子书设备、游戏设备或者前述各项的任意组合，包括这些设备的配件和外设或者其任意组合。在一些实施例中，电子设备2110也能够支持任意类型的针对用户的接口(诸如“可佩戴”电路等)。
应当理解，仅出于示例性的目的描述环境2100的结构和功能，而不暗示对于本公开的范围的任何限制。
图2B示出了根据本公开的一些实施例的用于文档演示的过程2200的流程图。过程2200可以在电子设备2110处实现。为便于讨论，将参考图2A的环境2100来描述过程2200。
在框2210，电子设备2110在文档2112的编辑页面中检测切换指示。编辑页面可以是用于用户2102对文档2112进行编辑的页面。编辑页面的若干示例将在下文中结合图2FA至图2FC以及图2G进行详细描述。在一些实施例中，切换指示可以例如是用户2102对编辑页面中的页面切换控件的诸如鼠标单击、鼠标双击、鼠标框选、鼠标悬浮、手指或者触控笔触摸、手指或者触控笔按压，等等。作为示例，用户2102在编辑页面中点击鼠标右键，以呈现选项菜单。该选项菜单中可以包括切换控件。当用户2102选择切换控件，电子设备2110可以检测到切换指示。在一些实施例中，切换指示也可以是用户2102的诸如语音控制等。本文中所采用的切换指示的形式在此方面不受限制。
在框2220处，电子设备2110确定是否接收到切换指示。如果在框2220处电子设备2110未接收到切换指示，则电子设备2110在框2210处继续检测切换指示。例如，电子设备2110可以持续不断地在文档的编辑页面中检测切换指示，直到检测到切换指示为止。备选地，电子设备2110可以按预定的时间间隔来检测该切换指示。在一些实施例中，也可以在一段时间之后停止对切换指示的检测。此外，还可以通过例如用户指示来启动对切换指示的检测。
附加地或备选地，在一些实施例中，电子设备2110也可以在文档2112的演示页面检测到切换指示，以切换为文档2112的编辑页面。通过在文档的编辑页面与演示页面中间灵活地切换，可以适应文档的不同应用场景。用户可以通过切换不同页面来对文档进行不同的操作。
如果在框2220处确定接收到上述切换指示，则电子设备2110在框2230处呈现文档2112的演示页面2120。演示页面2120包括在文档2112中输入的内容项的视图2124。此外，演示页面2120可能还包括文档2112中的其他内容。例如，电子设备2110可以响应于用户2102对文档2112的演示指示，呈现演示页面2120以对文档2112进行演示。在一些实施例中，内容项的视图2124可以具有多种不同的形式。关于视图2124的不同类型将在下文中结合图2EA至图2EF进一步描述。
在框2240处，电子设备2110检测对视图2124的触发指示。触发指示可以例如是用户2102对该视图2124的诸如鼠标单击、鼠标双击、鼠标框选、鼠标悬浮、手指或者触控笔触摸、手指或者触控笔按压，等等。本文中所采用的触发指示的形式在此方面不受限制。
在框2250处，电子设备2110确定是否检测到对视图2124的触发指示。如果在框2250处电子设备2110未检测到对视图2124的触发指示，则电子设备2110在框2240处继续检测对视图2124的触发指示。例如，电子设备2110可以持续不断地检测视图2124的触发指示，直到检测到触发指示为止。备选地，电子设备2110可以按预定的时间间隔来检测视图2124的触发指示，直到检测到触发指示为止。在一些实施例中，也可以在一段时间之后停止对视图2124的触发指示的检测。此外，还可以通过例如用户指示来启动对视图2124的触发指示的检测。
如果在框2250处电子设备检测到对视图2124的触发指示，则电子设备2110在框2260处在演示页面2120内呈现内容项。例如，电子设备2110可以无需跳转到演示页面2120之外的与内容项对应的页面。
在一些实施例中，电子设备2110可以在演示页面2120的浏览窗口中呈现内容项。例如，浏览窗口可以包括弹出窗口。在一些实施例 中，电子设备2110可以调用文档2112的应用框架。电子设备2110可以在文档2112的演示页面2120中构建浏览窗口，并且在浏览窗口中呈现内容项。例如，在输入内容是网页的示例中，电子设备2110可以在客户端构建浏览窗口来呈现内容项。备选地或附加地，在一些实施例中，电子设备2110可以调用承载文档2112的演示页面2120的页面框架。电子设备2110可以在文档2112的演示页面2120中构建浏览窗口，并且在该浏览窗口中呈现内容项。例如，在输入内容是网页的示例中，电子设备2110可以通过网页构建浏览窗口来呈现内容项。
通过在演示页面2120上呈现内容项，而不是跳转到演示页面2120之外的与内容项对应的页面(诸如，网页浏览器、视频播放器等)，能够避免文档的演示过程中的跳转，从而改善用户体验。
图2C示出了根据本公开的一些实施例的在浏览窗口中呈现内容项的示例的示意图。在图2C的示例中，浏览窗口2310是弹出窗口。视图2124所对应的输入的内容或者插入的内容项的内容在浏览窗口2310中被呈现。浏览窗口至少部分地覆盖在演示界面2120之上。演示页面2120呈现了文档2112中的视图2124以及可能的部分内容(未示出)。出于解释说明的目的，在图中呈现了特定的文本，但这样的文本并不构成对本公开的实施例的任何限制。
在一些实施例中，电子设备2110还可以对浏览窗口2310的关闭指示进行检测。例如，电子设备2110可以对关闭控件2312的触发指示。如果检测到对关闭控件2312的触发指示，则表示检测到对浏览窗口2310的关闭指示。在这种情况下，电子设备2110将会关闭该浏览窗口2310。此外，电子设备2110将会恢复到对演示页面2120的呈现，诸如下文中图2EA至图2EF所呈现的演示页面2120。
应理解，图2C中所示出的关闭控件2312的大小、形状和位置仅仅是示例性的，而不是限制性的。关闭控件2312可以具有其他的形状和大小，并且可以在浏览窗口2310的其他位置。附加地或备选地，关闭控件2312可以是可隐藏的，当用户2102例如将鼠标移动到关闭控件2312的位置处时，关闭控件2312可以从隐藏状态变为可视状态。
应理解，在一些实施例中，浏览窗口2310也可以是半透明的。例如，电子设备2110可以接收用户指示，来修改浏览窗口2310的透明度。虽然在图2C的示例中浏览窗口2310是弹出窗口，但在其他示例中，浏览窗口也可以是其他形式的窗口，例如可展开和收缩的窗口，或者在演示页面2120中固定位置的窗口，等等。例如，在视图2124占据演示页面2120的较大面积的示例中，浏览窗口可以在演示页面2120中该视图2124所处的位置处。在这一示例中，与视图2124相关联的输入的内容项可以在该视图2124的位置处呈现。
在一些实施例中，用户2102还可以与电子设备2110进行交互，以对浏览窗口2310中呈现的内容进行诸如翻页、滚动浏览等操作。为更好理解本公开的一些实施例，下文将参考用户界面图来进一步讨论。
图2DA示出了根据本公开的实施例的用于演示页面的交互示例的示意图。在图2DA的示例中，浏览窗口2310包括滚动条控件2410。电子设备2110被配置为响应于检测到针对滚动条控件2410的滚动操作来滚动呈现内容项。例如，如果向上滚动滚动条控件2410，则浏览窗口2310中呈现的内容将向上滚动，直到停止滚动滚动条控件2410或者该滚动条控件2410达到最上方位置为止。反之，如果向下滚动滚动条控件2410，则浏览窗口2310中呈现的内容将向下滚动，直到停止滚动滚动条控件2410或者该滚动条控件2410达到最下方位置为止。
图2DA中所示出的滚动条控件2410仅仅是示例性的，而不是限制性的。在一些实施例中，滚动条控件2410可以具有其他的形状、大小或者位置。图2DA的这类利用滚动条控件的实施例适用于诸如长文档类型的输入的内容项。以此方式，能够快速便捷地对内容项中要在浏览窗口中呈现的内容进行定位。
备选地或附加地，在一些实施例中，电子设备2110还可以响应于内容项的第一内容页在浏览窗口2310中被呈现的同时检测到翻页指示，来从浏览窗口2310移除对所述第一内容页的呈现，并且在浏览窗口2310中呈现内容项的第二内容页。例如，第二内容页可以是第一内容页之前的内容页、或者之后的内容页。
图2DB示出了根据本公开的实施例的用于演示页面的翻页交互示例的示意图。如图所示，浏览窗口2310中示出了上翻页控件2420和下翻页控件2430。如果电子设备2110检测到上翻页控件2420被触发，则电子设备2110从浏览窗口2310中移除当前内容页，并且呈现当前内容页的前一内容页(如果有的话)。如果电子设备2110检测到下翻页控件2430被触发，则电子设备2110从浏览窗口2310中移除当前内容页，并且呈现当前内容页的下一内容页(如果有的话)。
应理解，在一些实施例中，上翻页控件2420和下翻页控件2430可以是隐藏的未示出的控件。当用户2102点击或者触摸浏览窗口2310的诸如左下角位置，则上翻页控件2420被触发。类似地，当用户2102点击或者触摸浏览窗口2310的诸如右下角位置，则下翻页控件2430被触发。应理解，上、下翻页控件也可以被布置在浏览窗口2310中的其他位置，并且可以具有其他的大小和形状。图2CB的这类可以对内容项进行翻页呈现的实施例适用于例如分页显示的输入的或者插入的内容项，诸如演示文稿类型的文档。以此方式，能够快速便捷地对内容项中要在浏览窗口中呈现的内容进行定位。
应当理解，图2DA和图2DB示出的页面以及下文中将描述的其他附图中的页面仅仅是示例，实际可以存在各种页面设计。页面中的各个图形元素可以具有不同的布置和不同的视觉表示，其中的一个或多个元素可以省略或被替换，并且还可以存在一个或多个其他元素。本公开的实施例在此方面不受限制。
以上以滚动浏览和翻页浏览为例，示出了演示页面2120的若干交互示例。在一些实施例中，还可以具有更多的演示页面2120的交互示例。例如，在一些实施例中，输入的内容项可以包括可播放的多媒体内容，诸如音频文件、视频文件等等。电子设备2110可以在演示页面2120中播放多媒体内容。例如，电子设备2110可以在诸如弹出窗口或者占据较大面积的视图的位置处播放多媒体内容。在多媒体内容的播放过程中，电子设备2110可以响应于用户2102的交互指示，例如多媒体内容的播放定位、加速、减速播放等，来对播放的多媒体内容 进行控制。
通过上述演示页面2120的各个交互过程，文档2112中输入的或者插入的内容项可以在演示过程中打开并交互。以此方式，能够进一步地改善文档演示的用户体验。
应理解，文档2112的演示页面2120是用于对文档2112的内容项进行展示的页面。在一些实施例中，在文档2112的演示页面2120中，电子设备2110可以接收对文档的编辑页面中输入的内容的展示指令。附加地或备选地，电子设备2110还可以拒绝接收对编辑页面中输入的内容的编辑指令。以此方式，能够避免文档中在编辑页面中被输入的内容被用户在演示页面中错误地编辑或修改。
以上结合图2C至图2DB描述了通过触发视图2124来呈现与该视图2124相关联的内容项，并且对所呈现的内容项在演示过程中进行各种交互的若干示例。附加地或备选地，在一些实施例中，视图2124可以具有各种不同的类型，用户2102可以根据需要选择该内容项的视图。例如，在文档2112的编辑页面中，用户2102可以选中视图2124的类型。电子设备2110可以检测用户2102所选择的视图类型，以在文档2112中输入该类型的视图2124。
图2EA至图2EF示出根据本公开的一些实施例的用于文档演示的演示页面2120的示例的示意图，在这些示例中，视图2124可以具有不同的形式。例如，演示页面2120呈现了文档2112中的视图2124以及部分的内容。例如，所呈现的文档2112的内容包括一段文字2512以及视图2124。该段文字2512可以是文档2112中本身具有的内容，而不是输入的内容项。出于解释说明的目的，在图中呈现了特定的一段文本，但这样的文本并不构成对本公开的实施例的任何限制。应理解，虽然在图2EA至图2EF的示例中出于解释说明的目的，仅示出了一段文字2512和一个视图2124，但这仅仅是示例性的，而不是限制性的。演示页面2120中可以呈现更多的或更少的文字，也可以呈现更多的或更少的视图。
在一些实施例中，虽然未示出，但是演示页面2120中也可以设置 有诸如滚动条控件和/或翻页控件等控件，以用于对所呈现的文档2112的内容进行导航定位。此外，演示页面2120中也可以设置有关闭控件，以用于关闭当前的演示页面2120。
在图2EA至图2EC的示例中，文档2112的输入的内容项是一张图片，该图片名为“20220603.png”。在图2EA中，视图2124属于呈现与内容项相关联的第一信息的第一视图，该第一视图在文档2112中占据第一面积。即，第一视图在演示页面2120中占据第一面积。第一信息包括内容项的文件名2524。备选地或附加地，第一信息还可以包括内容项的文件类别的类别示意图2522。该类别示意图2522表示该内容项属于图片类别。
在图2EB中，视图2124属于呈现与内容项相关联的第二信息的第二视图。该第二视图在文档2112中占据第二面积。即，第二视图在演示页面2120中占据第二面积。第二面积可以大于上述第一视图所占据的第一面积。第二信息包括内容项的文件名2534以及内容项的辅助信息，诸如文件大小等。备选地或附加地，第二信息还可以包括内容项的文件类别的类别示意图2532。此外，第二信息还可以包括第二视图编辑指示符2536。用户2102可以通过触发第二视图编辑指示符2536，来对第二视图进行编辑。对第二视图的编辑过程将在下文中结合图2G进行详细描述。
在图2EC中，视图2124属于呈现与内容项相关联的第三信息的第三视图。该第三视图在文档2112中占据第三面积。即，第三视图在演示页面2120中占据第三面积。第三面积可以大于上述第二视图所占据的第二面积。例如，第三信息可以包括该内容项的缩略图或者预览图2542，或者包括内容项本身。备选地或附加地，第三信息还可以包括该输入的内容项的文件名2544。在一些实施例中，第三视图中还可以包括第三视图编辑指示符(未示出)。
类似地，在图2ED至图2EF的示例中，文档2112的输入的内容项是一个演示文稿，该演示文稿名为“演示文稿.ppt”。
在图2ED中，视图2124属于呈现与内容项相关联的第一信息的 第一视图，该第一视图在文档2112中占据第一面积。第一信息包括内容项的文件名2554，即“演示文稿.ppt”。备选地或附加地，第一信息还可以包括内容项的文件类别的类别示意图2552。该类别示意图2552表示该内容项属于演示文稿(即，ppt)类别。
在图2EE中，视图2124属于呈现与内容项相关联的第二信息的第二视图。该第二视图在文档2112中占据第二面积。第二面积可以大于上述第一视图所占据的第一面积。第二信息包括内容项的文件名2564以及内容项的辅助信息，诸如文件大小等。备选地或附加地，第二信息还可以包括内容项的文件类别的类别示意图2562。此外，第二信息还可以包括第二视图编辑指示符2566。用户2102可以通过触发第二视图编辑指示符2566，来对第二视图进行编辑。对第二视图的编辑过程将在下文中结合图2G进行详细描述。
在图2EF中，视图2124属于呈现与内容项相关联的第三信息的第三视图。该第三视图在文档2112中占据第三面积。第三面积可以大于上述第二视图所占据的第二面积。例如，第三信息可以包括该内容项的首页内容2572。备选地或附加地，第三信息还可以包括该输入的内容项的文件名2574。在一些实施例中，第三视图中还可以包括可选的第三视图编辑指示符。
如前所述，在一些实施例中，与视图2124相关联的内容项可以呈现在演示页面2120中视图2124所处的位置上。例如，在视图2124为第三视图的示例中，对内容项的浏览窗口可以在演示页面2120中第三视图所处的位置处。在这一示例中，与视图2124相关联的输入的或的内容项可以在第三视图的位置处呈现。例如，可以在第三视图的位置处播放多媒体内容。
以上结合图2EA至图2EF以图片类型和演示文稿类型的输入的内容项为例，描述了文档2112的演示页面2120以及输入的内容项的各种视图2124的若干示例。应理解，这些演示页面2120和视图2124的示例仅仅是示例性的，而不是限制性的。演示页面2120可以具有与图2EA至图2EF所示出的形状不同的形状，例如演示页面2120可以是 正方形或者圆形的，等等。演示页面2120也可以具有不同的尺寸，例如可以是13英寸、14英寸、3.5英寸，等等。视图2124可以属于上述详细描述的第一视图、第二视图、第三视图，或者其他适当的视图类型。上述各种视图除以上所列举的信息外，还可以分别示出其他信息，或者示出更少的信息。本公开的范围在此方面不受限制。
以上所描述的各种不同2124的视图可以被用户编辑和切换。图2FA示出了根据本公开的实施例的用于编辑内容项的视图2124的交互示例的示意图。例如，在文档2112的编辑页面2600中，当用户2102选中输入的内容项时，可以例如以悬浮工具栏的形式显示编辑工具栏2610。编辑工具栏2610中的各个图标对应于不同的编辑操作。例如，其中图标2612表示缩放操作，图标2614表示存储操作，图标2616表示添加第一视图的视图2124，图标2618表示将添加第二视图的视图2124，图标2622表示添加第三视图的视图2124，图标2624表示添加注释的操作，等等。在图2DA的示例中，以阴影表示图标2616被选中，即，添加第一视图的视图2124。
附加地或备选地，在文档2112的编辑模式或者在文档2112的编辑页面2600中，电子设备2110可以检测针对内容项的视图切换指示。该视图切换指示用于指示将视图2124切换到另一视图。响应于检测到视图切换指示，电子设备2110可以在文档2112中将视图2124切换为另一视图。图2FB示出了根据本公开的实施例的用于编辑内容项的视图2124的另一交互示例的示意图。在文档2112的编辑页面2600中，当用户2102选中输入的内容项的视图2124时，可以例如以悬浮工具栏的形式显示视图2124的切换工具栏2630。切换工具栏2630中的各个图标对应于不同的视图类型。图标2632表示将视图2124切换为第一视图，图标2634表示将视图2124切换为第二视图，而图标2636表示将视图2124切换为第三视图。在图2FB的示例中，以阴影表示图标2634被选中，在这一示例下，电子设备2110将要把视图2124切换为第二视图。
图2FC示出了根据本公开的实施例的用于编辑内容项的视图2124 的交互示例的示意图。响应于图2FB中检测到将视图2124切换为第二视图的视图切换指示(即，图标2634被选中)，电子设备2110将视图2124切换为图2FC中的视图2124。图2FC中的视图2124相比图2FB占据更大的面积，并且呈现了更多的信息。
在一些实施例中，电子设备2110可以在文档2112的编辑页面2600中检测对内容项的视图2124的触发。如果电子设备2110检测到在编辑页面2600中对内容项的视图2124的触发，则电子设备2110可以跳转到编辑页面2600之外的页面来显示内容项。例如，电子设备2110可以跳转到演示页面2120来显示内容项。
附加地或备选地，在一些实施例中，编辑页面2600中还设置有切换指示控件。如前文所描述的，用户2102可以通过触发切换指示控件来从编辑页面2600切换到演示页面2120。
应当理解，图2FA至图2FC示出的页面以及下文中将描述的其他附图中的页面仅仅是示例，实际可以存在各种页面设计。页面中的各个图形元素可以具有不同的布置和不同的视觉表示，其中的一个或多个元素可以省略或被替换，并且还可以存在一个或多个其他元素。本公开的实施例在此方面不受限制。
在一些实施例中，在文档2112的编辑页面2600中，电子设备2110还可以对视图2124进行进一步的编辑，例如编辑视图2124的布局等。例如，在文档2112的编辑页面2600中，电子设备2110可以检测针对内容项的视图编辑指示，该视图编辑指示用于指示对视图2124的布局的修改。电子设备2110进而可以基于视图编辑指示来修改视图2124的布局。
图2G示出了根据本公开的一些实施例的用于编辑内容项的视图的又一交互示例的示意图。例如，在文档2112的编辑页面2600中，如果电子设备2110检测到对视图2124中的第二视图编辑指示符2722的触发指示，则可以在演示页面2120中显示第二视图编辑窗口2730。第二视图编辑窗口2730可以包括视图模式选择图标(也称为卡片模式选择图标)以及视图背景选择图标(也称为卡片背景选择图标)。当 视图模式选择图标中的图标2732被选中时，将该视图2124保持为第二视图不变。反之，如果视图模式选择图标中的图标2734被选中，则视图2124可以被切换为第三视图。
在一些实施例中，视图背景选择图标可以用于选择视图2124的背景。例如，当图标2742被选中，视图2124的背景为白色。如果图标2744、图标2746和图标2748被选中，则视图2124的背景被分别调整为对应的图标所显示的图案。应理解，以上所描述的视图背景选择图标仅仅是示例性的，还可以采用更多的图标来表示视图2124的不同的背景颜色、背景图案，等等。视图2124的布局可以被修改为任何适当的布局和形式。本公开的范围在此方面不受限制。
以上以第二视图的视图2124为例，示出了通过触发第二视图编辑指示符2722来编辑第二视图。应理解，对于第三视图，也可以采用类似地方式对其进行编辑。
通过以上方式，用户可以对输入的内容项的视图进行选择和编辑。以此方式，用户可以根据需求选择该内容项的视图的不同展示方式。通过视觉上明显区分视图的面积，来适应不同的排版布局和重复阅读场景。例如，对于重要的输入内容，可以采用具有较大面积的第三视图。而对于较不重要的输入内容，可以采用较小面积的第一视图或者第二视图。以此方式，能够使用户在对文档进行排版时，针对内容优先级对视图样式和布局有更多的选择。
以上结合图2B至图2G描述了根据本公开的一些实施例的用于文档演示的示例过程。图2H示出了根据本公开的一些实施例的用于文档演示的另一过程2800的流程图。过程2800可以在电子设备2110处实现。为便于讨论，将参考图2A的环境2100来描述过程2800。
在框2810，电子设备2110检测对文档2112中内容项的视图2124的触发指示。触发指示可以例如是用户2102对该视图2124的诸如鼠标单击、鼠标双击、鼠标框选、鼠标悬浮、手指或者触控笔触摸、手指或者触控笔按压，等等。触发指示也可以是诸如语音触发指示等其他方式。本文中所采用的触发指示的形式在此方面不受限制。
在框2820，电子设备2110确定是否接收到或者检测到触发指示。在一些实施例中，如果在框2820处电子设备2110没有接收到触发指示，则电子设备2110可以在框2810处继续检测触发指示。如果在框2820处电子设备2110接收到触发指示，则电子设备2110在框2830处确定文档2112当前的页面类型。
在框2840处，电子设备2110确定文档2112的当前的页面类型是编辑页面还是演示页面。例如，编辑页面可以是编辑页面2600或者其他适当的编辑页面。演示页面可以是演示页面2120或者其他适当的演示页面。
如果在框2840处，电子设备2110确定页面类型为编辑页面2600，则电子设备2110在框2850处跳转到编辑页面2600之外的页面来呈现内容项。例如，电子设备2110可以跳转到演示页面2120或者其他适当的页面来呈现内容项。
如果在框2840处，电子设备2110确定页面类型为演示页面2120，则电子设备2110在框2860处在演示页面2120内呈现内容项。例如，电子设备2110可以在演示页面2120内呈现内容项，而无需跳转到演示页面2120之外的与内容项对应的页面。又如，电子设备2110可以在演示页面2120的浏览窗口中呈现内容项。例如，浏览窗口可以包括弹出窗口。
在一些实施例中，电子设备2110可以调用文档2112的应用框架。电子设备2110可以在文档2112的演示页面2120中构建浏览窗口，并且在浏览窗口中呈现内容项。备选地或附加地，在一些实施例中，电子设备2110可以调用承载文档2112的演示页面2120的页面框架.电子设备2110可以在文档2112的演示页面2120中构建浏览窗口，并且在该浏览窗口中呈现内容项。
通过在演示页面2120上呈现内容项，而不是跳转到与内容项对应的页面(诸如，网页浏览器、视频播放器等)，能够避免文档的演示过程中的跳转，从而改善用户体验。
电子设备2110在演示页面2120内呈现内容项的若干示例以及在 演示页面2120中的各种交互示例已经在前文中结合图2C和图2EA至图2EF进行了详细描述。上述示例均可以结合到过程2800中。在此不再进行赘述。
在一些实施例中，在呈现文档2112的编辑页面2600的示例中，电子设备2110还可以在文档2112的编辑页面2600中接收到切换指示。电子设备2110可以响应于该切换指示，而呈现文档2112的演示页面2120。演示页面2120包括在文档2112的编辑页面2600中输入的内容项的视图2124。在一些实施例中，如果电子设备2110检测到对视图的触发指示，则电子设备2110可以在演示页面2120内呈现该内容项。上述过程可以与过程2200中的框2210至框2230类似。在此不再进行赘述。应理解，在该情形下，电子设备2110还可以执行过程2200中框2240至框2260的过程以及其他任意附加的过程。这些过程的示例可以与上文结合附图描述图2B的若干示例类似，在此不再详细描述。
附加地或备选地，在文档2112的编辑页面2600中，电子设备2110还可以检测针对内容项的视图切换指示。视图切换指示用于指示将视图切换到另一视图。如果电子设备2110检测到视图切换指示，电子设备2110可以在文档中将视图切换为另一视图。上述视图切换过程与上文结合图2FA至图2FC描述的过程类似，在此不再进行赘述。
附加地或备选地，在文档2112的编辑页面2600中，电子设备2110还可以检测针对内容项的视图编辑指示。视图编辑指示用于指示对视图的布局的修改。如果电子设备2110检测到视图编辑指示，则电子设备2110可以基于视图编辑指示来修改视图的布局。上述视图布局的修改过程与上文结合图2G描述的过程类似，在此不再进行赘述。
在一些实施例中，在编辑页面2600中，电子设备2110可以接收对文档2112中的内容的编辑指示。电子设备2110可以根据编辑指令来对内容进行编辑。附加地或备选地，在一些实施例中，在演示页面2120中，电子设备2120可以接收对编辑页面2600下输入的内容的展示指令。此外，电子设备2120可以拒绝接收对内容的编辑指令。
以此方式，能够针对文档设置不同的页面来进行不同的操作。例如，通过仅在编辑页面对文档的内容进行编辑，而不在演示页面对文档的内容进行编辑，可以避免因用户在文档演示过程中的错误操作而将文档内容修改。又如，通过在演示页面呈现文档的内容，能够避免跳转到演示页面之外的与该内容对应的页面来显示该内容。通过这样，可以避免文档内容演示过程中的页面跳转，从而改善了文档演示的用户体验。
以上结合图2B和图2H描述了根据本公开的一些实施例的文档演示的示例过程的若干示例。应理解，上述各个过程中的各个步骤可以以任意方式相互结合地实现。上述过程中的各个步骤的顺序可以改变。上述过程中的步骤可以省略，也可以添加额外的步骤。
图2I示出了根据本公开的某些实施例的用于文档演示的装置2900的示意性结构框图。装置2900可以被实现为或者被包括在电子设备2110中。装置2900中的各个模块/组件可以由硬件、软件、固件或者它们的任意组合来实现。
如图所示，装置2900包括演示页面呈现模块2910，被配置为响应于在文档2112的编辑页面中接收到切换指示，呈现文档2112的演示页面2120。该演示页面2120包括在文档2112中输入的内容项的视图2124。装置2900还包括内容项呈现模块2920，被配置为响应于检测到对视图2124的触发指示，在演示页面2120内呈现内容项。例如，可以无需跳转到演示页面之外的与内容项对应的页面。
在一些实施例中，内容项呈现模块2920包括浏览窗口模块，被配置为调用文档2112的应用框架，在文档2112的演示页面2120中构建浏览窗口，在浏览窗口中呈现内容项。备选地或附加地，浏览窗口模块还被配置为调用承载文档2112的演示页面的页面框架，在文档2112的演示页面2120中构建浏览窗口，在浏览窗口中呈现内容项。
在一些实施例中，装置2900还包括关闭浏览窗口模块，该关闭浏览窗口模块被配置为响应于检测到对浏览窗口的关闭指示，关闭浏览窗口。
在一些实施例中，浏览窗口模块被配置为响应于内容项的第一内容页在浏览窗口中被呈现的同时检测到翻页指示，从浏览窗口移除对第一内容页的呈现；以及在浏览窗口中呈现内容项的第二内容页。
备选地或附加地，在一些实施例中，浏览窗口模块还包括滚动条控件。在这一示例中，浏览窗口模块还被配置为：响应于检测到针对滚动条控件的滚动操作来滚动呈现内容项。
在一些实施例中，插入的内容项的视图属于以下视图之一：呈现与内容项相关联的第一信息的第一视图，该第一视图在文档2112中占据第一面积；呈现与内容项相关联的第二信息的第二视图，该第二视图在文档2112中占据超过第一面积的第二面积；呈现与内容项相关联的第三信息的第三视图，该第三视图在文档2112中占据超过第二面积的第三面积。
在一些实施例中，视图2124包括第三视图，并且内容项呈现模块2920被配置为在演示页面2120中第三视图的位置处呈现内容项。
在一些实施例中，插入的内容项包括可播放的多媒体内容，诸如音频或视频，等等。在这样的实施例中，内容项呈现模块2920被配置为播放该多媒体内容。
在一些实施例中，装置2900还包括视图切换指示检测模块，被配置为在文档2112的编辑页面中，检测针对内容项的视图切换指示。该视图切换指示用于指示将视图2124切换到另一视图。装置2900还包括视图切换模块，被配置为响应于检测到视图切换指示，在文档2112中将视图切换为另一视图。
在一些实施例中，装置2900还包括视图编辑指示检测模块，被配置为在文档2112的编辑页面中，检测针对内容项的视图编辑指示。该视图编辑指示用于指示对视图2124的布局的修改。装置2900还包括视图布局修改模块，被配置为基于视图编辑指示来修改视图2124的布局。
在一些实施例中，装置2900还包括指令接收模块，被配置为在文档2112的演示页面2120中接收对编辑页面中输入的内容的展示指令， 以及拒绝接收对内容的编辑指令。
在一些实施例中，装置2900还包括页面跳转模块，被配置为响应于在文档2112的编辑页面中对内容项的视图的触发，跳转到编辑页面之外的页面来显示内容项。
图2J示出了根据本公开的某些实施例的用于文档演示的装置21000的示意性结构框图。装置21000可以被实现为或者被包括在电子设备2110中。装置21000中的各个模块/组件可以由硬件、软件、固件或者它们的任意组合来实现。
如图所示，装置21000包括页面类型确定模块21010，被配置为响应于接收到对文档2112中内容项的视图2124的触发指示，确定文档2112当前的页面类型。装置21000还包括页面跳转模块21020，被配置为响应于页面类型为编辑页面，跳转到编辑页面之外的页面来呈现内容项。装置21000还包括演示页面呈现模块21030，被配置为响应于页面类型为演示页面2120，在演示页面2120内呈现内容项。
在一些实施例中，装置21000还包括切换模块，被配置为响应于在文档2112的编辑页面中接收到切换指示，呈现文档2112的演示页面2120。演示页面2120可以包括在文档2112的编辑页面中输入的内容项的视图2124。
在一些实施例中，装置21000还可以包括内容项呈现模块，被配置为响应于检测到对视图2124的触发指示，在演示页面2120内呈现内容项。在一些实施例中，内容项呈现模块被配置为调用文档2112的应用框架，在文档2112的演示页面2120中构建浏览窗口，在浏览窗口中呈现内容项。备选地或附加地，内容项呈现模块可以被配置为调用承载文档2112的演示页面2120的页面框架，在文档2112的演示页面2120中构建浏览窗口，在浏览窗口中呈现内容项。
在一些实施例中，装置21000还包括关闭浏览窗口模块，该关闭浏览窗口模块被配置为响应于检测到对浏览窗口的关闭指示，关闭浏览窗口。在一些实施例中，浏览窗口模块被配置为响应于内容项的第一内容页在浏览窗口中被呈现的同时检测到翻页指示，从浏览窗口移 除对第一内容页的呈现；以及在浏览窗口中呈现内容项的第二内容页。附加地或附加地，在一些实施例中，浏览窗口模块还包括滚动条控件。在这一示例中，浏览窗口模块还被配置为：响应于检测到针对滚动条控件的滚动操作来滚动呈现内容项。
在一些实施例中，视图2124属于以下视图之一：呈现与内容项相关联的第一信息的第一视图，第一视图在文档2112中占据第一面积；呈现与内容项相关联的第二信息的第二视图，第二视图在文档2112中占据超过第一面积的第二面积；呈现与内容项相关联的第三信息的第三视图，第三视图在文档2112中占据超过第二面积的第三面积。在一些实施例中，视图2124可以包括第三视图，并且内容项呈现模块被配置为在演示页面2120中第三视图的位置处呈现内容项。在一些实施例中，插入的内容项包括可播放的多媒体内容，诸如音频或视频，等等。在这样的实施例中，内容项呈现模块被配置为播放该多媒体内容。
在一些实施例中，装置21000还包括视图切换指示检测模块，被配置为在文档2112的编辑页面中，检测针对内容项的视图切换指示。该视图切换指示用于指示将视图2124切换到另一视图。装置21000还包括视图切换模块，被配置为响应于检测到视图切换指示，在文档2112中将视图切换为另一视图。
在一些实施例中，装置21000还包括视图编辑指示检测模块，被配置为在文档2112的编辑页面中，检测针对内容项的视图编辑指示。该视图编辑指示用于指示对视图2124的布局的修改。装置21000还包括视图布局修改模块，被配置为基于视图编辑指示来修改视图2124的布局。
在一些实施例中，装置21000还包括指令接收模块，被配置为在文档2112的演示页面2120中接收对编辑页面中输入的内容的展示指令，以及拒绝接收对内容的编辑指令。
在一些实施例中，装置21000还包括页面跳转模块，被配置为响应于在文档2112的编辑页面中对内容项的视图的触发，跳转到编辑页面之外的页面来显示内容项。
通常，演示者可以在在线会议中通过会议界面向观众演示文档，或者可能通过演示设备在现场会议中向观众演示文档。这样的传统文档演示方式，观众只能在演示时被动查看由演示者控制展示的文档内容。在演示中或演示后，观众均无法执行与文档的交互。期望能够提供对被演示文档的更灵活的交互。
根据本公开的实施例，提出了一种文档交互方案，以支持在文档演示时的交互。根据该方案，在文档被演示时，呈现文档的访问路径信息，使其他终端设备能够基于该访问路径信息来访问文档。在访问文档后，其他终端设备在演示模式下呈现文档的演示视图。根据该方案，增强了在演示模式下用户与被演示文档的灵活访问以及交互能力，提升用户体验。
图3A示出了本公开的实施例能够在其中实现的示例环境3100的示意图。在该示例环境3100中，终端设备3110是用于进行文档演示的设备。例如，用户3102可以通过操作终端设备3110来呈现文档3105的视图3112。
文档3105可以是适于进行演示的任何文档格式，例如文本文档(例如，word文档)、演示文档(例如，PPT文档)、PDF文档等。在图3A的示例中，文档3105可以是在线文档，例如可以被存储在线上的文档库3140中。管理设备3130可以用于管理和维护在线文档。终端设备3110可以具有对文档3105的管理权限，包括访问、编辑、协作、分享等各类权限。例如，终端设备3110安装有对应的应用，该应用的登录用户(例如，用户3102)可以被分配有对文档3105的管理权限。终端设备3110可以通过网络3150与管理设备3130以及文档库3140进行通信。
在环境3100中，还存在终端设备3120-1、3120-1、......3120-N(为便于讨论，统称为或单独称为终端设备3120，其中N是大于等于1的整数)。这些终端设备3120分别可以由用户3104-1、3104-2、......3104-N(为便于讨论，统称为或单独称为用户3104)进行操作。终端设备3120也可以通过网络3150与终端设备3110和/或管理设备3130进行通信。
在本公开的实施例中，终端设备3120能够在终端设备3110的允许下访问文档3105。例如，终端设备3120-1、3120-2、......3120-N可以分别呈现文档3105的视图3122-1、3122-2、......3122-N(为便于讨论，统称为或单独称为视图3122)。在一些实施例中，终端设备3120也可以安装有对应的应用，该应用的登录用户(例如，用户3104)可以在允许的情况下具有针对文档3105的交互权限。
在一些示例场景中，用户3102可以在现场会议中操作终端设备3110来演示文档3105，或者可以在与一个或多个用户3104的线上会议中演示文档3105。
在本文中，出于区分的目的，有时将终端设备3110称为“第一终端设备”，将终端设备3120称为“第二终端设备”。应当理解，虽然在图3A中将终端设备3110示出为用于演示文档3105，但根据应用需要，任意终端设备均可以用于实现文档演示。
在图3A中，终端设备3110或3120可以是任意类型的移动终端、固定终端或便携式终端，包括移动手机、台式计算机、膝上型计算机、笔记本计算机、上网本计算机、平板计算机、媒体计算机、多媒体平板、个人通信系统(PCS)设备、个人导航设备、个人数字助理(PDA)、音频/视频播放器、数码相机/摄像机、定位设备、电视接收器、无线电广播接收器、电子书设备、游戏设备或者前述各项的任意组合，包括这些设备的配件和外设或者其任意组合。在一些实施例中，终端设备3110也能够支持任意类型的针对用户的接口(诸如“可佩戴”电路等)。管理设备3130可以是能够提供计算能力的任意类型的计算系统/服务器，包括但不限于大型机、边缘计算节点、云环境中的计算设备，等等。
应当理解，仅出于示例性的目的描述环境3100的架构以及其中的设备的功能，而不暗示对于本公开的范围的任何限制。例如，终端设备3110可以不与远端的管理设备3130通信。
以下将继续参考附图描述本公开的一些示例实施例。
图3B示出了根据本公开的一些实施例的用于文档交互的信令流 3200的流程图。信令流3200涉及终端设备3110和终端设备3120处实现。为便于讨论，将参考图3A的环境3100来描述信令流3200，因此假设终端设备3110是演示文档的设备，而终端设备3120是访问被演示文档的设备。在图3B中，虽然仅示出单个终端设备3120，但可以理解多个终端设备3120均可以与终端设备3110执行类似信令交互。
在信令流3200中，终端设备3110在文档3105被演示的同时，在文档的演示视图中呈现(3205)文档3105的访问路径信息。在一些实施例中，终端设备3110可以在文档3105的演示模式下，呈现(3202)文档3105的演示视图3112，并确定是否要在演示视图3112中呈现访问路径信息。
文档的演示视图指的是在演示模式下对文档的至少部分内容的组织或布局。文档的页面视图指的是在非演示模式下对文档的至少部分内容的组织或布局。在一些实施例中，在页面视图下可以对文档进行内容编辑、设置等操作。页面视图有时也称为普通视图或非演示视图。
在本公开的实施例中，为了使其他用户能够在文档3105被演示的同时获得更方便地获得对文档3105的灵活阅读和交互能力，在文档3105的演示视图3112中呈现文档3105的访问路径信息。
通过访问路径信息可以访问文档3105。文档3105可以是在线文档，并具有对应的访问路径。访问路径信息可以是任何形式，例如可以是二维码(QR code)、访问链接以及其他能够用于访问文档的信息。
在一些实施例中，终端设备3110可以基于用户请求来确定呈现文档3105的访问路径信息。具体地，终端设备3110可以检测对文档3105的演示时分享指示，以指示在演示时对文档3105进行分享。如果检测到这样的指示，终端设备3110将在文档3105被演示时呈现文档3105的访问路径信息。在一些实施例中，演示时分享指示可以在文档3105进入演示模式之前被触发，例如由用户3102触发。附加地或备选地，演示时分享指示也可以在文档3105处于演示模式时被触发。在一些实施例中，作为备选方案，也可以自动或默认在文档3105的演示视图中呈现文档的访问路径信息。
为更好理解，下文将参考示例来进行说明。图3CA至图3CD示出了根据本公开的一些实施例的在终端设备3110处呈现的文档3105的示例页面。应当理解，图3CA至图3CD以及下文中将描述的其他附图中的页面仅仅是示例页面，实际可以存在各种页面设计。页面中的各个元素可以具有不同的布置和不同的视觉表示，其中的一个或多个元素可以省略或被替换，并且还可以存在一个或多个其他元素。本公开的实施例在此方面不受限制。
图3CA示出了文档3105的页面视图3300，其中文档3105还未进入演示模式。作为示例，在页面视图3300下呈现文档内容。此外，还可以呈现一些可用功能，包括演示模式功能3310，用于触发进入演示模式；显示评论功能3312，用于显示文档3105的一些评论信息(如果已有的话)；以及更多选项3314，用于显示更多可用功能(如果有的话)。
如果演示模式功能3310被触发，例如由用户选择该功能，那么终端设备3110可以确定文档3105进入演示模式，并呈现如图3CB所示的演示视图3302。终端设备3110可以在用户3102的操作下控制文档3105的演示进度，以呈现文档3102的不同位置或区域中的内容。作为示例，在演示视图3302中，还可以呈现在演示模式下可触发的一些功能。如图所示，可以呈现退出演示功能3320，以触发退出文档3105的演示模式；分享文档功能3322，以触发演示时分享指示；以及更多选项3314，用于显示在演示模式下更多的可用功能(如果有的话)。
如果演示模式功能3310被触发，例如由用户选择该功能，那么终端设备3110可以检测到演示时分享指示。对演示模式功能3310的触发方式例如可以包括输入设备(例如，鼠标)点击或触摸手势、鼠标悬浮于该功能所处的位置处，等等。在演示视图3302中呈现文档3102的访问路径信息3330，如图3CC所示。在图3CC的示例中，访问路径信息3300被示出为二维码的形式，虽然其他形式的访问路径信息也同样适用。在一些实施例中，为更好呈现，还可以允许通过用户选择来放大访问路径信息。如图3CD所示，可以在弹出窗口3332中呈现 放大的访问路径信息3330。
应当理解，虽然通过图3CB示出在演示模式中触发演示时分享指示，但也可以允许用户在进入演示模式之前配置或者自动地确定要在演示时呈现文档的访问路径信息。
返回参考图3B，在文档3105的访问路径信息由终端设备3110呈现的情况下，终端设备3120获取(3210)文档3105的访问路径信息。终端设备3120能够基于该访问路径信息来访问文档3105。执行访问的终端设备3120可以是能够获得文档3105的访问路径信息的任意设备。
由于访问路径信息由终端设备3110呈现，终端设备3120可以通过各种方式获取该访问路径信息。例如，如果终端设备3120可以在用户3104的操作下扫描二维码，或者接收访问链接，进而访问文档3105。在一些实施例中，终端设备3120可以通过管理设备3130来访问在线的文档3105。例如，终端设备3120可以安装有能够访问在线的文档3105的应用，并通过应用来访问文档3105。
具体地，终端设备3120发起(3215)包括所获取的访问路径信息的访问请求。该访问请求可以被直接发送给终端设备3110，或者可以被发送给文档3105的管理设备3130，以使终端设备3120获得访问文档3105的能力，这取决于对文档3105的具体管理方式。基于终端设备3120发起的访问请求，终端设备3120将文档3105的演示视图提供(3220)给终端设备3120。文档的演示视图可以基于文档3105在终端设备3110处的演示进度。演示视图可以被直接发送给终端设备3120，或者经由管理设备3130发送给终端设备3120，这取决于对文档3105的具体管理方式。终端设备3120接收(3225)文档3105的演示视图，并在演示模式下呈现(3230)文档3105的演示视图。
在获得文档3105的演示视图后，在终端设备3120处可以执行对文档3105的一个或多个交互操作。终端设备3120可以基于接收到的交互操作来执行相应的处理。在一些实施例中，在文档3105被演示的同时，如果终端设备3120获得访问路径信息并访问文档105，可以向 终端设备3120提供文档3105所支持的，和/或文档3105的管理者(例如，用户3102)所允许的各种交互能力。这样的交互能力可以包括但不限于，文档的跟随演示或自由浏览能力、评论能力、评论浏览能力、特殊标识能力等等。
为更好理解，下文将参考附图的示例来进行说明。图3DA至图3DH示出了根据本公开的一些实施例的在终端设备3120处呈现的示例页面。在图3DA中，假设终端设备3120扫描二维码形式的访问路径信息3330，以获得对文档3105的访问。
在获得对文档3105的访问后，终端设备3120可以呈现文档3105的演示视图，其所包含的内容可以对应于终端设备3110上正在演示的文档3105的演示视图中的内容。
如图3DB所示，在访问文档3105后，终端设备3120可以在演示模式下呈现文档3105的演示视图3402。初始地，终端设备3120处呈现的演示视图3402可以同步到终端设备3110处呈现的演示视图3302。
在一些实施例中，在演示模式下，在终端设备3120处不支持对文档3105的自由浏览。也就是说，在演示模式下，终端设备3120根据文档3105在终端设备3110处的演示进度来呈现文档3105的演示视图。终端设备3120处所呈现的内容随着终端设备3110处的演示者(例如，用户3102)的演示操作而变化。
在一些实施例中，在终端设备3120处，可以支持用户通过某些预设交互指示来退出演示模式并切换到其他视图，例如页面视图。演示退出指示可以包括一个或多个指示。作为示例，可以提供特定控件，例如演示退出控件、视图切换控件、启动页面视图控件等，通过对该控件的触发来发起演示退出指示，以退出演示模式。附加地或备选地，还可以设置某些手势操作、鼠标操作或其他交互操作来触发演示退出指示。例如，如果检测到上下滑动手势或鼠标的上下滑动等，可以确定演示退出指示被发起，从而退出演示模式。
在一些实施例中，在退出演示模式后，可以在页面视图下呈现文档3105。在页面视图下可以支持用户对文档3105的自由浏览。因此， 终端设备3120将检测文档3105的浏览进度，并基于检测到的浏览进度来呈现文档的页面视图。
在一些实施例中，在终端设备3120处退出文档3105的演示模式后，还可以允许用户继续切换回演示模式。终端设备3120可以检测演示跟随指示，并在检测到该指示后进入演示模式。在演示模式下，继续根据文档3105在终端设备3110处的当前演示进度来呈现文档3105的演示视图。演示跟随指示可以包括一个或多个指示。作为示例，可以提供特定控件，例如演示跟随控件，通过对该控件的触发来发起演示跟随指示。在其他示例中，还可以通过特定手势操作或其他操作来发起演示跟随指示。
下面结合附图来继续说明。在一些实施例中，在终端设备3120处呈现的文档3105的演示视图中还可以包括在访问文档3105时由终端设备3120可触发的一些功能。如图3DB所示，演示视图3402可以包括演示跟随控件3420，用于同步到终端设备3110处的演示进度，使在终端设备3120处呈现的文档内容同步到在终端设备3110处正在被演示的文档内容；以及演示退出控件3422，用于退出演示模式以便用户自由浏览文档3105的内容，而无需同步到终端设备3110处的演示进度。此外，演示视图3402还可以包括显示评论控件3424，以显示文档3105中已有的评论信息(如果已有的话)；以及更多选项3426，用于显示更多可用控件(如果有的话)。应当理解，虽然图中示出了多个功能，但这些功能的一个或多个可以省略，或者可以包括更多其他功能。
在一些实施例中，在终端设备3120访问文档3105后，可以首先默认终端设备3120处呈现的演示视图同步到终端设备3110处的演示进度，也就是说呈现主持人或共享人(例如，用户3102)当前正在演示的内容。如果在演示模式下不支持对文档3105的自由浏览而终端设备3120的用户期望浏览文档3105的其他内容，则可以与文档3105交互，以触发与针对文档3105的演示退出指示，例如触发图3DB的演示退出控件3422。
如果检测到演示退出模式，可以退出演示模式，并呈现文档3105的页面视图。在页面视图下，终端设备3120可以独立于文档3105在终端设备3110处的演示进度来呈现文档3105的浏览页面。例如，终端设备3120可以基于用户3104对文档3105的浏览定位，例如经由鼠标或触发手势等方式所指示的浏览定位，来确定文档3105的浏览进度，并基于浏览进度来确定在页面视图下要呈现的内容。例如，如果在图3DB中检测到对演示退出控件3422的触发，如图3DC所示的页面视图3403，并继续根据用户浏览操作来呈现文档的其他部分内容。
如果用户3104期望继续跟随文档3105的演示进度，还允许用户触发与针对文档3105的演示跟随指示相对应的交互操作，例如在图3DC中触发演示跟随控件3420。如果检测到演示跟随操作，文档3105可以进入演示模式。终端设备3120可以基于文档3105在终端设备3110处的当前演示进度来呈现文档3105的演示视图。这样，终端设备3120处呈现的演示视图被同步到终端设备3110处正在演示的内容。在一些实施例中，终端设备3120可以从终端设备3110或从管理设备3130接收到针对文档3105的演示定位信息，以确定文档3105中正在被演示的位置。
注意，虽然示出了演示退出控件和演示跟随控件，在其他实施例中，还可以允许用户通过其他方式来触发演示退出指示或演示跟随指示。例如，可以允许用户通过输入设备或滑动手势等方式指示要浏览文档3105中演示内容之外的其他内容，或者可以通过设置其他图标来指示跟随共享人的演示。本公开的实施例在此方面不受限制。
在一些实施例中，在演示模式下，在终端设备3120处也支持用户对文档3105的自由浏览。此时的浏览将展示不同浏览进度对应的演示视图。具体地，在演示模式下，终端设备3120可以检测文档在第二终端设备处的浏览进度，并基于检测到的浏览进度来呈现文档的演示视图。例如，在图3DB的演示视图3402基础上，如果用户继续浏览(例如，通过滚动鼠标或滑动手势等文档浏览操作)，终端设备3120可以基于检测到的浏览进度呈现图3DD的演示视图3404。演示视图3404 中的内容可能并不同于在终端设备3110处正在被演示的内容。这样，可以支持在终端设备3120处对于演示内容的灵活控制。
在一些实施例中，在演示模式下自由浏览时，还可以允许用户重新定位到文档3105在终端设备3110处的演示进度。可以通过发起演示定位指示来定位到当前演示进度。演示定位指示可以包括一个或多个指示。如果检测到演示定位指示，终端设备3120可以根据文档3105在终端设备3110处的演示进度来呈现文档的演示视图。作为示例，可以提供特定控件，例如演示跟随控件，通过对该控件的触发来发起演示定位指示。如图3DD所示，在演示视图3404中可以提供演示跟随控件3428，通过对该控件的触发可以定位到文档3105在终端设备3110处的当前演示进度。在其他示例中，还可以通过特定手势操作或其他操作来发起演示定位指示。
在一些实施例中，如果退出演示模式并呈现文档3105的页面视图，在页面视图下，可以即支持用户对文档的自由浏览，还支持对演示进度的跟踪和定位。例如，在呈现页面视图的同时，可以通过发起演示定位指示来定位到当前演示进度。如果检测到演示定位指示，终端设备3120可以根据文档3105在终端设备3110处的演示进度来呈现文档3110的页面视图。
例如，在图3DC的文档视图3403中，也可以提供演示跟随控件3428，以用于定位到文档3105在终端设备3110处的演示进度。在定位到对应的演示进度后，以文档视图来呈现对应进度处的文档内容。
在一些实施例中，在与文档3105的交互过程中，特别支持访问文档3105的终端设备3120对文档3105的评论功能，以接收用户输入的针对文档3105的一个或多个片段的评论信息。
具体地，如果接收到的交互操作包括针对文档3105的一个或多个片段的评论信息，终端设备3120将评论信息提供3225给终端设备3110。
在一些实施例中，终端设备3120可以将接收到的评论信息发送给管理设备3130，并由管理设备3130同步到终端设备3110。在一些实 施例中，终端设备3120可以将接收到的评论信息直接发送给终端设备3110。
在一些实施例中，可以允许用户对文档3105中任意大小的片段进行评论。这样的片段例如可以包括单个字、单个词、多个字/词、段落、图片、表格等等。在一些实施例中，终端设备3120可以接收对文档3105中的某个片段的用户选择，并响应于检测到评论指示来提供用于输入评论的输入框。在一些实施例中，评论信息可以包括对文档3105的某个片段的新评论内容，或者可以包括文档3105中已有的评论的反馈或回复。在一些实施例中，可以允许在文档3105的演示视图和/或页面视图下输入评论信息。
下文将参考图3DE至图3DG的示例来说明终端设备3120处对文档3105的评论交互。仅为了讨论的目的，结合演示视图的示例来讨论评论交互。在一些实施例中，在页面视图下可以提供类似的评论交互。
如图3DE所示，终端设备3120可以检测到对浏览页面3404中的片段3430的用户选择，并相应地呈现评论控件3432。如果接收到用户3104对评论控件3432的触发，终端设备3120可以在浏览页面3404中呈现如图3DF所示的评论框3440，其中用户3104可以输入评论信息。
在一些示例中，如果文档3105还包括其他评论信息，终端设备3120还可以响应于用户3104的触发来呈现这些评论信息。例如，如图3DG所示，如果显示评论控件3424被触发，终端设备3120可以呈现先前输入的评论框3440，连同其他评论框3442。评论框3442包括针对浏览页面3404中的片段3434的评论信息。在一些实施例中，终端设备3120还可以检测到用户3112对评论信息的回复，例如在评论框3442的回复。
终端设备3120可以检测到的用户输入的评论信息，包括新评论或评论的回复，提供给终端设备3110，以便使对文档3105的评论在各个设备之间进行同步。
相比于传统演示，根据本公开的一些实施例，在文档的演示模式 下，支持针对文档的丰富交互能力，使用户能够根据需要浏览和与文档进行交互。
在一些实施例中，在终端设备3110侧，终端设备3110在获得评论信息后，将评论信息关联到文档3105的对应的一个或多个片段。这样，文档的演示者(例如用户3102)能够有机会了解到观众(例如，用户3104)是否对被演示的文档有任何问题或意见等，从而提升了交互体验。
在一些实施例中，终端设备3110可以从管理设备3130获得用户3104对文档3105的一个或多个片段的评论信息，或者可以直接从终端设备3120获得这样的评论信息。在一些实施例中，如果多个终端设备3120均对文档3105进行评论，终端设备3110也可以获得由多个终端设备3120提供的评论信息。在一些实施例中，终端设备3120也可以获得其他终端设备3120对文档3105的评论信息。这样的评论信息同步例如可以由管理设备3130或终端设备3110进行协调。
在一些实施例中，为了避免对演示者，例如用户3102造成打扰，如果在文档3105正在被演示的同时终端设备3110接收到评论信息，那么可以暂缓呈现关于评论信息的提示，例如暂缓通知有新的评论信息到达，或者暂缓呈现评论信息本身。
在一些实施例中，还可以根据演示者的需要来呈现在文档3105的演示过程中接收到的评论信息。例如，终端设备3110可以检测针对评论信息的允许呈现指示。如果检测到这样的允许呈现指示，终端设备3110可以在文档的演示视图中呈现接收到的评论信息。例如，如果用户3102期望在演示过程中保持与观众的互动，或者期望在演示完文档的内容之后集中回复观众的评论，那么用户3102可以在文档3105进入演示模式之前或者在演示过程中触发针对评论信息的允许呈现指示。在一些实施例中，允许呈现指示可以指示用于呈现在文档3105的演示过程中接收到评论信息，从而可以避免将与本次演示无关的评论信息也进行呈现。应当理解，对于评论信息的提醒或呈现，可以根据实际应用需要进行具体配置。
在一些实施例中，如果终端设备3110确定允许在文档3105的演示过程中呈现评论信息，那么终端设备3110可以向终端设备3120也发送针对评论信息的允许呈现指示。响应于这样的指示，终端设备3120也可以将在本端或者其他终端设备3120接收到的评论信息呈现在文档3105的演示视图中。在一些实施例中，评论信息可以以弹幕形式被呈现在终端设备3110和/或终端设备3120处。在一些实施例中，评论信息可以被呈现在页面的特定区域中，类似于图3DF和图3DG所示的示例。
在一些实施例中，在终端设备3110处，还可以允许将在文档3105被演示的同时接收到的评论信息进行特殊标记，例如将这些评论信息标记为在文档3105被演示时获得。这样，可以方便用户将本次演示中收集到的评论信息与其他评论信息相区分。
在一些实施例中，在终端设备3120处，在用户3104与文档3105交互过程中，还可以允许用户3104执行对文档3105的特殊标识，以将文档标记为用户期望的状态。具体地，如果终端设备3120接收到交互操作对应于针对文档3105的特殊标识请求，终端设备3120还可以将文档3104标记为该特殊标识请求对应的状态。特殊标识请求例如可以请求将文档3105标识为收藏状态，点赞状态、关注状态(例如，关注文档评论)，或者任何其他可允许的标识。如图3DH所示，在更新选项3426被触发后，终端设备3120可以呈现允许对文档3105执行的更多功能，包括“收藏文档”、“关注文档评论”等。
通过对文档进行特殊标识，用户3104还可以在演示结束后继续获得关于文档3105的信息。在一些实施例中，终端设备3120还可以自动存储关于文档3105的访问记录，以至少记录文档3105的访问路径信息。这样，用户3104可以在演示结束后仍然能够继续根据需要来访问文档3105。
在一些实施例中，对文档3105的标识或访问记录的存储可以基于文档3105的管理者，例如用户3102的权限配置来进行。例如，用户3102可以配置是否允许在文档被演示时访问文档3105的终端设备收 藏文档、关注文档的评论、后续再次访问文档，等等。这样，文档的管理者能够更灵活地控制文档的各类交互权限。
图3E示出了根据本公开的一些实施例的用于文档交互的过程3500的流程图。过程3500可以在终端设备3110处实现。
在框3510，终端设备3110在文档被演示的同时在文档的演示视图中呈现文档的访问路径信息。在框3520，终端设备3110基于至少一个第二终端设备(例如，至少一个终端设备3120)发起的包括访问路径信息的访问请求，将文档的演示视图提供给至少一个第二终端设备。
在一些实施例中，过程3500还包括：从至少一个第二终端设备获得针对文档的至少一个片段的评论信息；以及将评论信息关联到文档的至少一个片段。
在一些实施例中，呈现文档的访问路径信息包括：检测对文档的演示时分享指示；以及响应于检测到演示时分享指示，呈现文档的访问路径信息。
在一些实施例中，过程3500还包括：如果在文档被演示的同时接收到评论信息，暂缓呈现关于评论信息的提示。
在一些实施例中，过程3500还包括：检测针对评论信息的允许呈现指示；以及响应于检测到允许呈现指示，在文档的演示视图中呈现评论信息。
在一些实施例中，过程3500还包括：向至少一个第二终端设备提供允许呈现指示，以使评论信息被呈现在至少一个第二终端设备处。
在一些实施例中，将评论信息关联到文档的至少一个片段包括：如果在文档被演示的同时接收到评论信息，将评论信息标记为指示评论信息在文档被演示时获得。
图3F示出了根据本公开的一些实施例的用于文档交互的过程3600的流程图。过程3600可以在终端设备3120处实现。
在框3610，终端设备3120获取文档的访问路径信息，文档在第一终端设备(例如，终端设备3110)处正被演示。在框3620，终端设备3120发送针对文档的访问请求，访问请求包括访问路径信息。在框 3630，终端设备3120接收文档的演示视图。在框3640，终端设备3120在演示模式下呈现文档的演示视图。
在一些实施例中，呈现文档的演示视图包括：在演示模式下，根据文档在第一终端设备处的演示进度来呈现文档的演示视图。
在一些实施例中，过程3600还包括：如果检测到演示退出指示，退出演示模式；检测文档在第二终端设备处的浏览进度；以及基于检测到的浏览进度来呈现文档的页面视图。
在一些实施例中，过程3600还包括：如果检测到演示跟随指示，进入演示模式；以及根据文档在第一终端设备处的演示进度来呈现文档的演示视图。
在一些实施例中，过程3600还包括：如果检测到演示定位指示，根据文档在第一终端设备处的演示进度来呈现文档的页面视图。
在一些实施例中，呈现文档的演示视图包括：在演示模式下，检测文档在第二终端设备处的浏览进度；以及基于检测到的浏览进度来呈现文档的演示视图。
在一些实施例中，呈现文档的演示视图还包括：如果检测到演示定位指示，根据文档在第一终端设备处的演示进度来呈现文档的演示视图。
在一些实施例中，过程3600还包括：接收针对文档的至少一个文档片段的评论信息；以及将评论信息提供给第一终端设备。
在一些实施例中，过程3600还包括：如果确定交互操作对应于针对文档的自由浏览指示，独立于文档在第一终端设备处的演示进度来呈现文档的浏览页面；以及如果确定交互操作对应于针对文档的演示跟随指示，基于文档在第一终端设备处的演示进度来呈现文档的演示视图。
在一些实施例中，过程3600还包括：从第一终端设备接收针对评论信息的允许呈现指示；以及响应于允许呈现指示，在文档的演示视图中呈现评论信息。
在一些实施例中，过程3600还包括：如果确定交互操作对应于针 对文档的特殊标识请求，将文档标记为特殊标识请求对应的状态。
在一些实施例中，过程3600还包括：存储关于文档的访问记录，访问记录至少包括文档的访问路径信息。
图3G示出了根据本公开的某些实施例的用于文档交互的第一装置3700的框图。第一装置3700可以被实现为或者被包括在终端设备3110中。第一装置3700中的各个模块/组件可以由硬件、软件、固件或者它们的任意组合来实现。
如图所示，第一装置3700包括访问路径呈现模块3710，被配置为在文档被演示的同时在文档的演示视图中呈现文档的访问路径信息。第一装置3700还包括视图提供模块3720，被配置为基于至少一个第二装置发起的包括访问路径信息的访问请求，将文档的演示视图发送给至少一个第二装置。
在一些实施例中，第一装置3700还包括：从评论获得模块，被配置为至少一个第二装置获得针对文档的至少一个片段的评论信息；以及评论关联模块，被配置为将评论信息关联到文档的至少一个片段。
在一些实施例中，访问路径呈现模块3710包括：分享指示检测模块，被配置为检测对文档的演示时分享指示；以及基于分享指示的呈现模块，被配置为响应于检测到演示时分享指示，呈现文档的访问路径信息。
在一些实施例中，第一装置3700还包括暂缓提示模块，被配置为：如果在文档被演示的同时接收到评论信息，暂缓呈现关于评论信息的提示。
在一些实施例中，第一装置3700还包括呈现指示检测模块，被配置为：检测针对评论信息的允许呈现指示；以及评论呈现模块，被配置为响应于检测到允许呈现指示，在文档的演示视图中呈现评论信息。
在一些实施例中，第一装置3700还包括呈现指示提供模块，被配置为：向至少一个第二装置提供允许呈现指示，以使评论信息被呈现在至少一个第二装置处。
在一些实施例中，评论关联模块包括：评论标记模块，被配置为 如果在文档被演示的同时接收到评论信息，将评论信息标记为指示评论信息在文档被演示时获得。
图3H示出了根据本公开的某些实施例的用于文档交互的第二装置3800的框图。第二装置3800可以被实现为或者被包括在终端设备3120中。第二装置3800中的各个模块/组件可以由硬件、软件、固件或者它们的任意组合来实现。
如图所示，第二装置3800包括访问获取模块3810，被配置为获取文档的访问路径信息，所述文档在所述第一装置处正被演示。第二装置3800还包括请求发起模块3820，被配置为发起针对所述文档的访问请求，所述访问请求包括所述访问路径信息。第二装置3800还包括视图接收模块3830，被配置为接收所述文档的演示视图。第二装置3800还包括视图呈现模块3840，被配置为在演示模式下呈现所述文档的所述演示视图。
在一些实施例中，视图呈现模块3840包括：基于演示进度的第一呈现模块，被配置为在演示模式下，根据文档在第一装置处的演示进度来呈现文档的演示视图。
在一些实施例中，第二装置3800还包括：演示退出模块，被配置为如果检测到演示退出指示，退出演示模式；浏览进度检测模块，被配置为检测文档在第二装置处的浏览进度；以及页面视图呈现模块，被配置为基于检测到的浏览进度来呈现文档的页面视图。
在一些实施例中，第二装置3800还包括：演示模式进入模块，被配置为如果检测到演示跟随指示，进入演示模式；以及基于演示进度的第二呈现模块，被配置为根据文档在第一装置处的演示进度来呈现文档的演示视图。
在一些实施例中，第二装置3800还包括：第一演示定位模块，被配置为如果检测到演示定位指示，根据文档在第一装置处的演示进度来呈现文档的页面视图。
在一些实施例中，视图呈现模块3840包括：演示浏览模块，被配置为在演示模式下，检测文档在第二装置处的浏览进度；以及基于浏 览进度的呈现模块，被配置为基于检测到的浏览进度来呈现文档的演示视图。在一些实施例中，视图呈现模块3840还包括：第一演示定位模块，被配置为如果检测到演示定位指示，根据文档在第一装置处的演示进度来呈现文档的演示视图。
在一些实施例中，第二装置3800还包括：评论接收模块，被配置为接收针对文档的至少一个文档片段的评论信息；以及评论提供模块，被配置为将评论信息提供给第一装置。
在一些实施例中，第二装置3800还包括自由浏览模块，被配置为：如果确定交互操作对应于针对文档的自由浏览指示，独立于文档在第一装置处的演示进度来呈现文档的浏览页面；以及演示跟随模块，被配置为如果确定交互操作对应于针对文档的演示跟随指示，基于文档在第一装置处的演示进度来呈现文档的演示视图。
在一些实施例中，第二装置3800还包括呈现指示接收模块，被配置为：从第一装置接收针对评论信息的允许呈现指示；以及评论呈现模块，被配置为响应于允许呈现指示，在文档的演示视图中呈现评论信息。
在一些实施例中，第二装置3800还包括文档标记模块，被配置为：如果确定交互操作对应于针对文档的特殊标识请求，将文档标记为特殊标识请求对应的状态。
在一些实施例中，第二装置3800还包括访问记录存储模块，被配置为：存储关于文档的访问记录，访问记录至少包括文档的访问路径信息。
图4A示出了本公开的实施例能够在其中实现的示例环境4100的示意图。在该示例环境4100中，电子设备4110可以对文档4112的内容进行显示。例如，电子设备4110可以呈现针对文档4112的视图4120。电子设备4110可以在视图4120中呈现文档4112中的内容。在本文中，文档4112可以是任意适于演示的文档格式，例如word文档等。文档4112可以存储在电子设备4110的存储装置中，也可以存储在与电子设备4110可通信的诸如云存储中。
在一些实施例中，视图4120可以由电子设备4110中的例如文档编辑应用或者文档演示应用提供。视图4120可以具有适合于电子设备4110的显示区域大小的显示区域面积，或者具有其他适当的预定的或由用户指定的显示区域面积。在一些实施例中，视图4120可以包括文档视图，例如文档4112的编辑视图。附加地或备选地，视图4120也可以包括演示视图，用于提供对文档4112的演示。
在一些实施例中，用户4102可以与电子设备4110进行交互。例如，用户4102可以通过与电子设备4110交互，来对文档4112的视图4120进行各种交互操作。关于用户4102与电子设备4110的各种交互过程将在下文中进行详细描述。
电子设备4110可以是任意类型的移动终端、固定终端或便携式终端，包括移动手机、台式计算机、膝上型计算机、笔记本计算机、上网本计算机、平板计算机、媒体计算机、多媒体平板、个人通信系统(PCS)设备、个人导航设备、个人数字助理(PDA)、音频/视频播放器、数码相机/摄像机、定位设备、电视接收器、无线电广播接收器、电子书设备、游戏设备或者前述各项的任意组合，包括这些设备的配件和外设或者其任意组合。在一些实施例中，电子设备4110也能够支持任意类型的针对用户的接口(诸如“可佩戴”电路等)。
应当理解，仅出于示例性的目的描述环境4100的结构和功能，而不暗示对于本公开的范围的任何限制。
如前所述，文档演示遍布在人们的生活、工作和社交等各个方面，例如，会议汇报、企业宣传、产品推介、活动展示等领域。在文档演示场景中，有时并不期望对文档的全部内容进行呈现，而是期望仅呈现文档中的部分内容。例如，有时会在文档演示的开始阶段针对全文进行简短的演讲，随后再对全文的具体内容进行详细的汇报。举例来说，可能会在会议开始阶段对会议中需要重点关注的内容进行快速汇报演讲，即内容导读。这些需要重点关注的内容通常仅仅是文档的部分内容。换句话说，在很多场景下，都需要先对文档的部分内容进行简短的演讲，在对文档的全部内容进行详细的演讲。
一种文档演示的常规方案是诸如演示文稿(PPT)式的纯汇报。演示文稿中通常仅包含了需要重点关注的内容，而不具有较为详细的文档内容。这种演示文稿的文档演示方案仅适用于对重点关注的内容进行导读，而无法提供对具体内容的演讲和呈现。
另一种文档演示的常规方案是文档式的纯阅读。这种文档式的纯阅读难以提供对需要重点关注内容的导读演示。此外，这种纯文档式的文档演示通常无法突出演示的重点内容，这种演示通常较为枯燥，难以令人满意。
综上所述，目前的文档演示方案均无法满足既能够对文档的重点内容进行演示，又提供对文档的具体内容的详细演讲的要求。因此，希望能够提出对文档进行既讲又演的文档演示方案，从而改善用户体验。
根据本公开的实施例，提出了一种改进的文档内容显示的方案。在该方案中，能够在文档的当前视图下对文档中的部分内容进行选择，例如能够选择文档内的内容块中的目标内容块。在检测到对选中的部分内容，即，目标内容块的内容演示指示后，基于目标内容块生成包括至少一个内容页面的目标视图。目标内容块的内容显示在至少一个内容页面中。
该方案能够支持对文档的部分内容(即，目标内容块)的选择，并且支持呈现演示选中的部分内容的演示界面。以此方式，文档既可以被部分地演示，也可以被完整的演示。此外，不需要将文档的部分内容创建为单独的演示文稿即可展示文档的部分内容。通过这样，可以大大拓宽文档的演示场景，从而提供更多样、灵活的文档演示。
图4B示出了根据本公开的一些实施例的用于文档内容显示的过程4200的流程图。过程4200可以在电子设备4110处实现。为便于讨论，将参考图4A的环境4100来描述过程4200。
在框4210处，电子设备4110在文档4112的当前视图下，接收对文档4112内的内容块中的目标内容块的选择操作，以确定目标内容块。例如，用户4102可以采用鼠标、指点设备、触控笔、手指等等方 式，来对文档4112中的目标内容块进行选择操作。本公开的实施例在此方面不受限制。电子设备4110可以确定出用户4102对目标内容块的选择。这些被选中的目标内容块将会在后续的文档内容显示过程中被呈现。以此方式，能够使用户可以对期望被演示的文档的部分内容进行选择，进而使得能够支持对文档部分内容的演示。关于对文档部分内容进行演示的详细过程将在下文中进行详细描述。
在一些实施例中，文档4112可以是诸如基于DocX架构的文档。文档4112可以包括多个内容块。换句话说，在文档4112的架构内可以承载一个或多个内容项。内容块可以是文档中的实体。内容块也可以是文档4112的最小编辑单元。例如，一个内容块可以是一段文字、一张图片、一张表格、一段代码、一个链接，等等。文档4112可以看作是多个内容块的集合，或者看作包括多个内容块的容器。在本文中，“内容块”也可以被称为“块”、“内容项”或“内容区”。在这样的实施例中，可以通过对文档4112中的内容块的选择，来选择目标内容块。应理解，在一些实施例中，文档4112也可以基于能够支持对文档内容的部分选择的其他现有的或未来的文档架构。本公开的实施例在此方面不受限制。
在一些实施例中，电子设备4110可以检测针对文档4112中的目标区域的选择。目标内容块可以包括位于该目标区域内的内容块。例如，在文档4112的编辑界面或者查看界面中，用户4102可以通过鼠标框选或者手指触摸等方式来选择文档4112中的目标区域。电子设备4110可以通过检测对目标区域的选择，来确定目标内容块。
附加地或备选地，还可以采用其他方式来选择目标内容块。例如，在一些实施例中，文档4112的当前视图可以是第一视图，例如文档页面视图。在本文中，可以在其下对文档4112进行编辑等操作的视图被称为“第一视图”。在文档4112的当前视图是第一视图的示例中，电子设备4110可以获取当前焦点的移动路径，将移动路径上的内容块作为选择的目标内容块。附加地或备选地，电子设备4110可以确定当前焦点所在位置对应的内容块，根据快捷选择指示将该内容块作为目标 内容块。
附加地或备选地，在文档4112的当前视图是第一视图的示例中，电子设备4110还可以接收内容筛选的指示。如果电子设备4110接收到内容筛选的指示，则电子设备4110可以确定当前视图下的全部内容块，在每个内容块的关联位置生成预设标记。电子设备4110还可以接收对预设标记的编辑操作。电子设备4110还可以基于对预设标记的编辑操作来确定目标内容块。
例如，在一些实施例中，预设标记可以具有未选中的初始状态。例如，预设标记可以是具有未选中的初始状态的选择框。在这种情况下，电子设备4110可以接收对预设标记的确认选中。备选地，在一些实施例中，预设标记可以具有被选中的初始状态。例如，预设标记可以是已被选中的选择框。在这种情况下，电子设备4110可以接收对预设标记的取消选中。电子设备4110可以将与经过标记操作之后的被选中的预设标记对应的内容块确定为目标内容块。
在一些实施例中，文档4112的当前视图可以是第二视图。第二视图可以是基于第一视图生成的。在本文中，将基于第一视图生成的视图称为“第二视图”。例如，第二视图可以是基于文档页面视图生成的演示页面视图。与第一视图下的示例类似，在文档4112的当前视图是第二视图的示例中，电子设备4110可以接收内容筛选的指示。如果电子设备4110接收到内容筛选的指示，则电子设备4110可以确定第二视图下的全部内容块，在每个内容块的关联位置生成预设标记。电子设备4110还可以接收对预设标记的编辑操作。电子设备4110还可以基于对预设标记的编辑操作来确定目标内容块。
例如，在一些实施例中，预设标记可以具有未选中的初始状态。例如，预设标记可以是具有未选中的初始状态的选择框。在这种情况下，电子设备4110可以接收对预设标记的确认选中。备选地，在一些实施例中，预设标记可以具有被选中的初始状态。例如，预设标记可以是已被选中的选择框。在这种情况下，电子设备4110可以接收对预设标记的取消选中。电子设备4110可以将与经过标记操作之后的被选 中的预设标记对应的内容块确定为目标内容块。
附加地或备选地，与第一视图下的示例类似，在当前视图为第二视图的示例中，电子设备4110可以获取当前焦点的移动路径，将移动路径上的内容块作为选择的目标内容块。附加地或备选地，电子设备4110可以确定当前焦点所在位置对应的内容块，根据快捷选择指示将该内容块作为目标内容块。
虽然以上描述了在当前视图为第一视图或者第二视图的示例中，电子设备4110可以利用当前焦点的移动路径或位置以及利用预设标记等不同方式来确定目标内容块。但在一些实施例中，可以在第一视图下仅采用利用当前焦点的移动路径或位置来确定目标内容块的方式。在第二视图下可以仅采用利用预设标记来确定目标内容块的方式。不同视图下所能够采用的确定目标内容块的方式可以是预先设置的、也可以灵活地选择或者更改。本公开的实施例在此方面不受限制。
以上结合图4B描述了确定目标内容块的若干示例。接下来将结合图4CA至图4CF描述用于确定目标内容块的更多的示例。
图4CA至图4CC示出了根据本公开的一些实施例的对文档4112的目标内容块进行选择的示例的示意图。应当理解，图4CA示出的页面以及下文中将描述的其他附图中的页面仅仅是示例，实际可以存在各种页面设计。页面中的各个图形元素可以具有不同的布置和不同的视觉表示，其中的一个或多个元素可以省略或被替换，并且还可以存在一个或多个其他元素。本公开的实施例在此方面不受限制。
在图4CA中，在当前的视图4300中呈现了文档4112的多个内容块，例如内容块4310、内容块4320、内容块4330和内容块4340。在一些实施例中，视图4300可以包括第一视图或者文档页面视图。视图4300可以是由电子设备4110提供的诸如文档编辑视图、文档查看视图，等等。出于解释说明的目的，仅在视图4300中呈现了文档4112中的其中四个内容块。应理解，文档4112中可以具有更少的或者更多的内容块。虽然在图4CA的示例中，文档4112的内容块均为文字块，但在其他实施例中，内容块也可以是其他内容块，例如图片块、表格 块，等等。此外，虽然在图中呈现了特定的文本，但这样的文本并不构成对本公开的实施例的任何限制。
在图4CB中，示出了对图4CA中的视图4300中的部分内容块的选择。如前所述，电子设备4110可以获取当前焦点的移动路径，将移动路径上的内容块作为选择的目标内容块。例如，箭头4302与箭头4304之间的移动路径4306(也称为轨迹)可以是诸如由用户4102利用鼠标、手指等交互工具选择的当前焦点的移动路径。电子设备4110可以检测移动路径4306，并且将位于移动路径4306上的内容块4310和内容块4320作为选择的目标内容块。
附加地或备选地，电子设备4110还可以将覆盖移动路径4306的预定形状(例如，矩形)的区域作为所检测到的目标区域。在这一示例中，内容块4310和内容块4320至少部分地位于所检测到的目标区域内，而内容块4330和内容块4340不位于该目标区域内。在这种情况下，电子设备4110将内容块4310和内容块4320确定为用户选中的目标内容块。
如图4CC所示，在视图4300中以具有底色的内容块示出了图4CB中由用户选中的目标内容块，即内容块4310和内容块4320。
在一些实施例中，视图4300中还可以布置有例如滚动条控件(未示出)或者翻页控件(未示出)，以对视图4300中所呈现的文档4112的内容进行定位。附加地或备选地，视图4300中还可以布置有关闭控件(未示出)。电子设备4110可以检测对关闭控件的触发指示，以将视图4300关闭。
图4CD至图4CF示出了根据本公开的一些实施例的对文档4112的内容进行选择的另一示例的示意图。在图4CD至图4CF的示例中，视图4300中呈现了文档4112中的在内容块4310至内容块4340之后的几个内容块，例如包括表1的名称的内容块4360、包括一个表格的内容块4370和包括一段文字的内容块4380。可以通过滚动条控件或者翻页控件来使视图4300呈现图4CD中的内容。应理解，虽然在图中呈现了特定的文本和表格，但这样的文本和表格并不构成对本公开 的实施例的任何限制。
在图4CE中，示出了对图4CD中的视图4300中的部分内容块的选择。如前所述，在一些实施例中，电子设备4110可以确定当前焦点所在位置对应的内容块，根据快捷选择指示将该内容块作为目标内容块。例如，在当前焦点位于箭头4362所示出的位置时，可以通过诸如鼠标单击或双击、或者手指触摸或按压等快捷选择指示将内容块4360确定为目标内容块。类似地，在当前焦点位于箭头4364所示出的位置时，可以通过任何适当的快捷选择指示将内容块4370确定为目标内容块。
如图4CF所示，在视图4300中以具有灰色的底色的内容块示出了图4CE中由用户选中的目标内容块，即内容块4360和内容块4370。
在一些实施例中，电子设备4110可以在图4CB至图4CC的示例中将内容块4310和内容块4320添加到目标内容块中，并且在图4CE至图4CF的示例中将内容块4360和内容块4370添加到目标内容块。即，目标内容块可以包括内容块4310、内容块4320、内容块4360和内容块4370。
以上结合图4CA至图4CF描述了在当前视图为第一视图的示例下，利用当前焦点的移动路径或者位置来确定目标内容块的若干过程。应理解，上述示例过程也可以被应用于当前视图为第二视图的示例中。此外，在一些实施例中，在当前视图为第一视图或者第二视图的示例中，也可以采用内容筛选模式来确定目标内容块。
接下来将结合图4DA至图4DE描述根据本公开的实施例的采用内容筛选模式确定目标内容块的交互示例的示意图。在文档4112的当前的视图4400是第二视图的示例中，电子设备4110可以接收内容筛选的指示。在图4DA的示例中，视图4400中布置有内容筛选控件4410。用户4102可以通过例如点击或者触摸内容筛选控件4410来触发对内容筛选的指示。
附加地或备选地，视图4400中还布置有演示设置控件4420。用户4102可以通过触发演示设置控件4420来修改对目标内容块的呈现， 例如修改视图的大小、背景，等等。通过对该演示设置控件4420的触发检测，电子设备4110可以根据用户4102的需求来改变对目标内容块的呈现形式，例如进行多视图的切换。通过对视图的设置，可以使文档4112的显示场景被大大拓宽了。
在一些实施例中，如果电子设备4110接收到内容筛选的指示，则电子设备4110可以确定第二视图下的全部内容块，并且在每个内容块的关联位置生成预设标记。例如，预设标记可以包括选择框。以预设标记为选择框为例，如果内容筛选控件4410被选中(示出为具有阴影框线)，则电子设备4110可以检测到对内容筛选的指示。在这种情况下，电子设备4110可以在视图4400中呈现与文档4112的多个内容块相关联的多个选择框。例如，与内容块4310相关联的选择框4412、与内容块4320相关联的选择框4414、与内容块4330相关联的选择框4416以及与内容块4340相关联的选择框4418(如图4DB至图4DE所示)。
在一些实施例中，电子设备4110还可以接收对预设标记的编辑操作。电子设备4110还可以基于对预设标记的编辑操作来确定目标内容块。以预设标记为选择框为例，电子设备4110可以基于被选择的至少一个选择框来确定被选中的目标内容块。
在一些实施例中，预设标记可以具有未选中的初始状态。例如，预设标记可以是具有未选中的初始状态的选择框。在这种情况下，电子设备4110可以接收对预设标记的确认选中。电子设备4110可以将与经过标记操作之后的被选中的预设标记对应的内容块确定为目标内容块。例如，用户可以根据需要将一个或多个选择框改变为选中状态。此时，对选择框的选择指示可以是对选择框的确认选中指示。在这种示例中，电子设备4110可以将与检测到确认选中指示的至少一个选择框相关联的至少一个内容块确定为被选中的目标内容块。
例如，如图4DB中所示出的，多个选择框4412、4414、4416和4418默认为未选中状态。用户4102可以根据需要确认对一个或多个选择框的选择，使一个或多个选择框变为选中状态。在图4DC的视图 4400中示出了用户4102对选择框的确认选中指示的示例。在其中呈现有对钩“√”的选择框4412和选择框4414是用户4102所选中的选择框，即，被电子设备4110检测到确认选中指示的选择框。电子设备4110可以将与选择框4412相关联的内容块4310以及与选择框4414相关联的内容块4320确认为被选中的目标内容块。在图4DC的示例中，将被选中的内容块呈现为具有灰色的底色，以表示其被选中。
备选地，在一些实施例中，预设标记可以具有被选中的初始状态。例如，预设标记可以是已被选中的选择框。在这种情况下，电子设备4110可以接收对预设标记的取消选中。在这种情形下，用户可以根据需要确认对一个或多个选择框的取消选择，使一个或多个选择框变为未选中状态。此时，对选择框的选择指示可以是对选择框的取消选中指示。电子设备4110可以将与多个选择框中除检测出取消选中指示的至少一个选择框之外的其他选择框相关联的内容块确定为被选中的目标内容块。
例如，在一些实施例中，与图4DB中的实施例不同，图4DD的视图4400中所呈现的多个选择框4412、4414、4416和4418默认为未选中状态，即，选择框中呈现有对钩“√”。在这一示例中，默认选中的各个内容块也以灰色底色示出为选中的内容。用户4102可以根据需要确认对一个或多个选择框的取消选择，使一个或多个选择框变为未选中状态。在这种情形下，当用户4102对其中某个选择框进行选择指示的触发，可以触发对该选择框的取消选中指示。例如，用户4102可以触发对选择框4416和选择框4418的取消选中指示。
在图4DE的视图4400中示出了用户4102对选择框的取消选中指示的示例。与图4DD中的各个选择框相比，可以看出，选择框4416和选择框4418从选中状态变为了未选中状态。经过对用户4102的取消选中指示的检测，电子设备4110可以将与未被取消选中的选择框4412和选择框4414相关联的内容块确定为用户4102选中的目标内容块。换句话说，电子设备4110可以将与选择框4412相关联的内容块4310以及与选择框4414相关联的内容块4320确认为被选中的目标内 容块。在图4DE的示例中，将为被取消选中的内容块呈现为具有灰色的底色，以表示其属于被选中的目标内容块。
以上以选择框作为预设标记的示例为例描述了根据用户对预设标记的编辑操作来确定目标内容块的若干示例。应理解，虽然在图4DA至图4DE的示例中，视图4400为第二视图，但是视图4400也可以包括第一视图。本公开的实施例在此方面不受限制。
以上描述了各种基于当前焦点或者预设标记的方式来确定目标内容块。通过上述各种方式以及其他可能的方式，用户4102可以在第一视图或者第二视图下灵活地选择使用鼠标框选、鼠标点选、触屏控制、选择框筛选等等方式来选择目标内容块。确定目标内容块的这些灵活的方式，进一步改善了用户体验。
继续参考图4B。在框4220处，电子设备4110在目标内容块被确定时，接收对目标内容块的内容演示指示。
例如，在一些实施例中，当前视图为第一视图，例如视图4300。在该视图下，可以在任一被确定的目标内容块的关联位置显示第一控件。电子设备4110可以通过第一控件接收对目标内容块的内容演示指示。用户4102可以触发第一控件，例如通过鼠标点击或者手指触控，等等。本文中所采用的触发指示的形式在此方面不受限制。电子设备4110可以对各种内容演示指示进行检测。
附加地或备选地，在一些实施例中，当前视图为第二视图，例如视图4400。可以在第二视图的页面中的预设位置显示第二控件。电子设备4110可以通过第二控件来接收对目标内容块的内容演示指示。用户4102可以触发第二控件，例如通过鼠标点击或者手指触控，等等。本文中所采用的触发指示的形式在此方面不受限制。电子设备4110可以对各种内容演示指示进行检测。
在框4230处，电子设备4110确定是否检测到内容演示指示。如果在框4230处电子设备4110检测到内容演示指示，则电子设备4110在框4240处基于目标内容块生成包括至少一个内容页面的目标视图。目标内容块的内容显示在至少一个内容页面中。反之，如果在框4230 处没有检测到内容演示指示，则电子设备4110可以返回到框4220处，以继续在目标内容块被确定时接收对目标内容块的内容演示指示。例如，电子设备4110可以在目标内容块被确定时不断地或者按照预定的时间间隔来检测内容演示的指示。
附加地或备选地，在一些实施例中，如果在框4230处没有检测到内容演示指示，则电子设备4110还可以返回到框4210处(未示出)，以继续接收对文档内的内容块中的目标内容块的选择操作。此外，在一些实施例中，框4210与框4220可以并行执行。也就是说，电子设备4110可以在继续检测对目标内容块的选择的同时，在已有部分内容块被选中的同时检测内容演示指示。
在一些实施例中，电子设备4110可以基于目标内容块的类型、内容量和内容关联度中的至少一项，确定目标视图包括的内容页面的数量。电子设备4110可以将目标内容块显示在对应的内容页面中。
例如，电子设备4110可以根据目标内容块的内容量与内容页面的大小，确定目标视图包括的内容页面的数量。又如，电子设备4110可以根据目标内容块的类型或者内容关联度在内容页面中布局目标内容量，将目标内容块中类型相同或者内容相关联的内容块布局在同一内容页面中。电子设备4110可以根据目标内容块的布局，来确定目标视图包括的内容页面的数量。
此外，在一些实施例中，还可以根据目标内容块的类型，设置目标内容块在内容页面中所占据的大小。例如，如果目标内容块是图片，则可以在内容页面中占据较大的面积。又如，如果目标内容块是一个短语，则可以在内容页面中占据较小的面积。根据不同目标内容块在内容页面中所占据的大小，来确定目标视图所包括的内容页面的数量。
以上仅列举了确定内容页面数量的若干示例，应理解，可以采用其他适当的方法来确定内容页面的数量。本公开的实施例在此方面不受限制。
在一些实施例中，当前视图下的目标内容块中可以包括互动标识。例如，互动标识可以是用于添加或显示评论。例如，用户可以针对文 档4112中的某个内容块，例如一段话、一个短语或者一个字等进行评论。在用户对该内容块添加了评论之后，可以在该内容块的位置处或者该内容块的旁边位置显示互动标识。
附加地或备选地，可以在生成的目标内容块的目标视图中隐藏该互动标识。通过隐藏互动标识，能够使演示界面更加简洁，去除干扰。在一些实施例中，也可以在生成的目标内容块的目标视图中显示该互动标识。例如，可以由用户来选择隐藏或者显示该互动标识。以此方式，可以在用户相应进行互动操作时显示互动标识，以便进行互动操作。
在一些实施例中，电子设备4110可以响应于对互动标识的触发操作，在目标视图的相应内容页面中显示互动内容。例如，电子设备4110可以在第二视图下接收对互动标识的触发，从而显示与该互动标识相对应的评论内容。以此方式，可以在文档4112的演示状态下仍然能够显示互动标识，从而提供互动操作。
附加地或备选地，电子设备4110还可以在目标内容块被确定时，接收对目标内容块的内容导出指示。例如，可以通过内容导出控件来接收内容导出指示。内容导出控件可以位于第一视图或者第二视图的任意位置。用户对内容导出控件的触发方式可以是任意的。本公开的范围在此方面不受限制。
图4E示出了根据本公开的实施例的用于对所选中的文档4112的目标内容块进行交互的示例的示意图。在图4E的示例中，在视图4500中，当检测到如箭头4364所指示的位置被选中，即，内容块4360被选中(图示为阴影方框)，电子设备4110可以检测对选中的目标内容块的进一步交互。视图4500可以是第一视图，或者备选地可以是第二视图。例如，用户4102可以在箭头4364的位置处鼠标双击、鼠标右键选中、手指按压，等等，以触发功能栏4510的呈现。如果检测到该触发，则电子设备4110可以在视图4500上呈现功能栏4510。在一些示例中，功能栏4510可以默认或根据配置被呈现在视图4500中，而无需用户触发。
在一些实施例中，功能栏4510中可以包括各种交互功能。例如，图标4512表示复制，即，可以将所选中的目标内容块或者当前所选中的内容块4360进行复制。又如，图标4514表示剪切，其可以将所选中的目标内容块或者当前所选中的内容块4360进行剪切。再如，图标4516表示删除，其可以将所选中的目标内容块或者当前所选中的内容块4360进行删除。
在一些实施例中，功能栏4510中包括演示图标4518。用户4102可以通过触发演示图标4518来指示进行内容演示。即，如果电子设备4110检测到对演示图标4518的触发，即表示检测到了内容演示的指示。当检测到内容演示的指示，电子设备4110可以呈现用于显示目标内容块的演示页面视图。演示页面视图的示例将在下文结合图4FA和图4FB进行描述。
附加地或备选地，功能栏4510中可以包括评论图标4518。在本文中，评论图标4518也被称为互动标识。用户4102可以通过触发评论图标4518，来对所选中的目标内容块或者当前所选中的内容块4360添加评论。附加地，用户4102可以通过触发评论图标4518，来查看先前对所选中的目标内容块或者当前所选中的内容块4360添加的评论。
附加地或备选地，功能栏4510中可以包括导出图标4524。用户4102可以触发导出图标4524，以指示对目标内容块的导出。如果电子设备4110检测到对导出图标4524的触发，即，检测到内容导出的指示，电子设备4110可以将文档4112中被选中的目标内容块保存为另一文档。在一些实施例中，功能栏4510中也可以不包括导出图标4524。当检测到内容演示的指示，则电子设备4110可以自动将目标内容块导出为另一文档。该另一文档可以存储在电子设备4110的存储装置中，或者存储在与电子设备4110通信的云存储中。
通过将选中的目标内容块保存为另一文档，可以在对文档4112的之后的演示过程中，直接打开该另一文档而无需对文档4112的内容进行再次选择。此外，所选中的目标内容块通常为文档4112中的重点内 容，可以对所保存的另一文档进行打印等，来查看文档4112中的重点内容。
应理解，图4E中所示出的功能栏4510的大小、形状和位置仅仅是示例性的，而不是限制性的。功能栏4510可以包括与图4E中所示出的相同的或不同的、更多的或更少的功能控件。虽然在图4E的示例中，功能栏4510是响应于检测到对某个内容块的交互触发而显示的，在其他实施例中，功能栏4510可以是可隐藏的，当用户4102例如将鼠标或者手指等移动到功能栏4510的预定位置(例如，视图4500的左上角或者其他适当的位置)处时，功能栏4510可以从隐藏状态变为可视状态。此外，当功能栏4510被呈现时，可以与各个内容块分离，或者至少部分地覆盖在某个或某些内容块的上方。本公开的实施例在此方面不受限制。
以上结合图4E描述了对所选中的文档内容进行各种交互的示例。接下来将结合图4FA和图4FB描述根据本公开的一些实施例的用于文档内容显示的视图4600的示例。将结合图4CA至图4CD的示例来描述图4FA和图4FB中的视图4600。
如前所述，在图4CB和图4CD的示例中，内容块4310、内容块4320、内容块4360和内容块4370分别被选中。如果在这些内容块被选中的同时检测到内容演示的指示，则电子设备4110将会呈现视图4600。该视图4600中呈现了被选中的内容块4310、内容块4320、内容块4360和内容块4370。
在一些实施例中，视图4600可以包括关闭控件4612。当用户4102对关闭控件4612进行触发，例如鼠标点击关闭控件4612或者手指按压关闭控件等，则电子设备4110可以检测到该触发。在这种情况下，电子设备4110可以响应于对关闭控件4612的触发而关闭视图4600。
应理解，图4FA和图4FB中所示出的关闭控件4612的大小、形状和位置仅仅是示例性的，而不是限制性的。关闭控件4612可以具有其他的形状和大小，并且可以在视图4600的其他位置。附加地或备选地，关闭控件4612可以是可隐藏的，当用户4102例如将鼠标移动到 关闭控件4612的位置处时，关闭控件4612可以从隐藏状态变为可视状态。
附加地或备选地，在一些实施例中，虽然未示出，但是视图4600中也可以设置有诸如滚动条控件和/或翻页控件等控件，以用于对所呈现的目标内容块进行导航定位。例如，目标内容块可以在多个内容页面上被呈现。如果电子设备4110检测到对翻页控件的触发，可以将视图4600从当前所呈现的内容页面切换到另一内容页面，例如下一页面或者前一页面。又如，如果电子设备4110检测到对滚动条控件的触发，可以将视图4600所呈现的内容页面进行滚动呈现。
在一些实施例中，视图4600中可以呈现互动标识4620。该互动标识4620可以用来表示用户4102对该处的内容块4370添加过互动内容，例如评论。用户4102可以触发互动标识。电子设备4110可以响应于对互动标识4620的触发操作，在视图4600的相应内容页面中显示互动内容，例如用户4102添加的评论。
例如，在图4FB的视图4600中示出了互动内容4630。该互动内容4630是响应于对互动标识4620的触发而被呈现的。应理解，所图示的互动内容4630的内容仅是示例性的，而不是限制性的。互动内容4630可以包括任意适当的文字、表情、符号，等内容。
附加地或备选地，用户4102也可以通过触发互动标识4620来对之前的互动内容进行修改，等等。例如，用户4102可以对互动内容进行回复。以此方式，能够在演示状态下的视图中仍然向用户提供交互例如互动功能，从而提高用户体验。
应理解，虽然在视图4600中仅示出了一个内容页面，但在一些实施例中，视图4600中可以包括多个内容页面。内容页面的数量可以根据目标内容块而被确定。本公开的实施例在此方面不受限制。
应当理解，图4FA和图4FB中所示出的视图或页面以及本文中描述的其他附图中的视图或页面仅仅是示例，实际可以存在各种界面设计。视图中的各个图形元素可以具有不同的布置和不同的视觉表示，其中的一个或多个元素可以省略或被替换，并且还可以存在一个或多 个其他元素。本公开的实施例在此方面不受限制。
根据本方案，能够对文档的部分内容进行选择，并且支持呈现演示被选中的部分内容的演示页面视图。以此方式，文档既可以被部分地演示，也可以被完整的演示。换句话说，文档既可以用于汇报，也可以用于阅读。此外，还可以对被选中的部分内容进行诸如复制、保存、添加评论等等交互。通过这样，可以大大拓宽文档的演示场景，从而提供更多样、灵活的文档演示。
图4G示出了根据本公开的某些实施例的用于文档内容显示的装置4700的示意性结构框图。装置4700可以被实现为或者被包括在电子设备4110中。装置4700中的各个模块/组件可以由硬件、软件、固件或者它们的任意组合来实现。
如图所示，装置4700包括目标内容块确定模块4710，被配置为在文档4112的当前视图下，接收对文档4112内的内容块中的目标内容块的选择操作，以确定目标内容块。
装置4700还包括内容演示指示接收模块4720，被配置为在目标内容块被确定时，接收对目标内容块的内容演示指示。
装置4700还包括目标视图生成模块4730，被配置为基于目标内容块生成包括至少一个内容页面的目标视图。目标内容块的内容显示在至少一个内容页面中。
在一些实施例中，文档4112的当前视图为第一视图。在这种情形下，目标内容块确定模块4710可以包括：移动路径获取模块，被配置为获取当前焦点的移动路径，将移动路径上的内容块作为选择的目标内容块；和/或，焦点位置确定模块，被配置为确定当前焦点所在位置对应的内容块，根据快捷选择指示将内容块作为目标内容块。
附加地或备选地，在一些实施例中，文档4112的当前视图为第二视图。该第二视图基于第一视图生成。在这种情形下，目标内容块确定模块4710可以包括：内容筛选模块，被配置为响应于接收到内容筛选的指示，确定第二视图下的全部内容块，在每一个内容块的关联位置生成预设标记；编辑操作接收模块，被配置为接收对预设标记的编 辑操作；以及第二目标内容块确定模块，被配置为基于对预设标记的编辑操作确定目标内容块。
在一些实施例中，预设标记可以具有未选中的初始状态。编辑操作接收模块可以被配置为接收对预设标记的确认选中。附加地或备选地，预设标记可以具有被选中的初始状态。编辑操作接收模块可以被配置为接收对预设标记的取消选中。在一些实施例中，第二目标内容块确定模块被配置为将与经过编辑操作后被选中的预设标记对应的内容块确定为目标内容块。
在一些实施例中，文档4112的当前视图为第一视图。在这种情形下，内容演示指示接收模块4720包括第一控件模块，被配置为在任一被确定的目标内容块的关联位置显示第一控件，通过第一控件接收对目标内容块的内容演示指示。
在一些实施例中，文档4112的当前视图为第二视图，该第二视图基于第一视图生成。在这种情形下，内容演示指示接收模块4720包括第二控件模块，被配置为在第二视图的页面中的预设位置显示第二控件，通过第二控件接收对目标内容块的内容演示指示。
在一些实施例中，目标视图生成模块4730包括：内容页面数量确定模块，被配置为根据目标内容块的类型、内容量和内容关联度中的至少一项，确定目标视图包括的内容页面的数量；以及内容块显示模块，被配置为将目标内容块显示在对应的内容页面中。
在一些实施例中，内容页面数量确定模块被配置为根据目标内容块的内容量与内容页面的大小，确定目标视图包括的内容页面的数量。
附加地或备选地，在一些实施例中，内容页面数量确定模块被配置为根据目标内容块的类型或者内容关联度在内容页面中布局目标内容块，将目标内容块中类型相同或者内容相关联的内容块布局在同一内容页面中；以及根据目标内容块的布局，确定目标视图包括的内容页面的数量。
在一些实施例中，装置4700还包括内容导出指示接收模块，被配置为在目标内容块被确定时，接收对目标内容块的内容导出指示；以 及保存模块，被配置为响应于检测到内容导出指示，将目标内容块保存为另一文档。
在一些实施例中，当前视图下的目标内容块中包括互动标识。目标视图生成模块4730可以被配置为在目标视图中与目标内容块对应的内容中隐藏互动标识。附加地或备选地，在一些实施例中，目标视图生成模块4730可以被配置为在目标视图中与目标内容块对应的内容中显示互动标识。在一些实施例中，装置4700还包括互动内容显示模块，被配置为响应于对互动标识的触发操作，在目标视图的相应内容页面中显示互动内容。
在一些实施例中，在文档4112的框架内可承载一个或多个内容块，内容块为文档4112的最小编辑单元。
图4H示出了示出了其中可以实施本公开的一个或多个实施例的电子设备4800的框图。应当理解，图4H所示出的电子设备4800仅仅是示例性的，而不应当构成对本文所描述的实施例的功能和范围的任何限制。图4H所示出的电子设备4800可以用于实现图1A的电子设备1110、图2A的电子设备2110、图3A的电子设备3110和图4A的电子设备4110。
如图4H所示，电子设备4800是通用电子设备的形式。电子设备4800的组件可以包括但不限于一个或多个处理器或处理单元4810、存储器4820、存储设备4830、一个或多个通信单元4840、一个或多个输入设备4850以及一个或多个输出设备4860。处理单元4810可以是实际或虚拟处理器并且能够根据存储器4820中存储的程序来执行各种处理。在多处理器系统中，多个处理单元并行执行计算机可执行指令，以提高电子设备4800的并行处理能力。
电子设备4800通常包括多个计算机存储介质。这样的介质可以是电子设备4800可访问的任何可以获得的介质，包括但不限于易失性和非易失性介质、可拆卸和不可拆卸介质。存储器4820可以是易失性存储器(例如寄存器、高速缓存、随机访问存储器(RAM))、非易失性存储器(例如，只读存储器(ROM)、电可擦除可编程只读存储器 (EEPROM)、闪存)或它们的某种组合。存储设备4830可以是可拆卸或不可拆卸的介质，并且可以包括机器可读介质，诸如闪存驱动、磁盘或者任何其他介质，其可以能够用于存储信息和/或数据(例如用于训练的训练数据)并且可以在电子设备4800内被访问。
电子设备4800可以进一步包括另外的可拆卸/不可拆卸、易失性/非易失性存储介质。尽管未在图4H中示出，可以提供用于从可拆卸、非易失性磁盘(例如“软盘”)进行读取或写入的磁盘驱动和用于从可拆卸、非易失性光盘进行读取或写入的光盘驱动。在这些情况中，每个驱动可以由一个或多个数据介质接口被连接至总线(未示出)。存储器4820可以包括计算机程序产品4825，其具有一个或多个程序模块，这些程序模块被配置为执行本公开的各种实施例的各种方法或动作。
通信单元4840实现通过通信介质与其他电子设备进行通信。附加地，电子设备4800的组件的功能可以以单个计算集群或多个计算机器来实现，这些计算机器能够通过通信连接进行通信。因此，电子设备4800可以使用与一个或多个其他服务器、网络个人计算机(PC)或者另一个网络节点的逻辑连接来在联网环境中进行操作。
输入设备4850可以是一个或多个输入设备，例如鼠标、键盘、追踪球等。输出设备4860可以是一个或多个输出设备，例如显示器、扬声器、打印机等。电子设备4800还可以根据需要通过通信单元4840与一个或多个外部设备(未示出)进行通信，外部设备诸如存储设备、显示设备等，与一个或多个使得用户与电子设备4800交互的设备进行通信，或者与使得电子设备4800与一个或多个其他电子设备通信的任何设备(例如，网卡、调制解调器等)进行通信。这样的通信可以经由输入/输出(I/O)接口(未示出)来执行。
根据本公开的示例性实现方式，提供了一种计算机可读存储介质，其上存储有计算机可执行指令，其中计算机可执行指令被处理器执行以实现上文描述的方法。根据本公开的示例性实现方式，还提供了一种计算机程序产品，计算机程序产品被有形地存储在非瞬态计算机可 读介质上并且包括计算机可执行指令，而计算机可执行指令被处理器执行以实现上文描述的方法。
这里参照根据本公开实现的方法、装置、设备和计算机程序产品的流程图和/或框图描述了本公开的各个方面。应当理解，流程图和/或框图的每个方框以及流程图和/或框图中各方框的组合，都可以由计算机可读程序指令实现。
这些计算机可读程序指令可以提供给通用计算机、专用计算机或其他可编程数据处理装置的处理单元，从而生产出一种机器，使得这些指令在通过计算机或其他可编程数据处理装置的处理单元执行时，产生了实现流程图和/或框图中的一个或多个方框中规定的功能/动作的装置。也可以把这些计算机可读程序指令存储在计算机可读存储介质中，这些指令使得计算机、可编程数据处理装置和/或其他设备以特定方式工作，从而，存储有指令的计算机可读介质则包括一个制造品，其包括实现流程图和/或框图中的一个或多个方框中规定的功能/动作的各个方面的指令。
可以把计算机可读程序指令加载到计算机、其他可编程数据处理装置、或其他设备上，使得在计算机、其他可编程数据处理装置或其他设备上执行一系列操作步骤，以产生计算机实现的过程，从而使得在计算机、其他可编程数据处理装置、或其他设备上执行的指令实现流程图和/或框图中的一个或多个方框中规定的功能/动作。
附图中的流程图和框图显示了根据本公开的多个实现的系统、方法和计算机程序产品的可能实现的体系架构、功能和操作。在这点上，流程图或框图中的每个方框可以代表一个模块、程序段或指令的一部分，模块、程序段或指令的一部分包含一个或多个用于实现规定的逻辑功能的可执行指令。在有些作为替换的实现中，方框中所标注的功能也可以以不同于附图中所标注的顺序发生。例如，两个连续的方框实际上可以基本并行地执行，它们有时也可以按相反的顺序执行，这依所涉及的功能而定。也要注意的是，框图和/或流程图中的每个方框、以及框图和/或流程图中的方框的组合，可以用执行规定的功能或动作 的专用的基于硬件的系统来实现，或者可以用专用硬件与计算机指令的组合来实现。
以上已经描述了本公开的各实现，上述说明是示例性的，并非穷尽性的，并且也不限于所公开的各实现。在不偏离所说明的各实现的范围和精神的情况下，对于本技术领域的普通技术人员来说许多修改和变更都是显而易见的。本文中所用术语的选择，旨在最好地解释各实现的原理、实际应用或对市场中的技术的改进，或者使本技术领域的其他普通技术人员能理解本文公开的各个实现方式。

Claims (77)

  1. 一种用于呈现文档的方法，包括：
    呈现文档的第一视图，所述文档包括至少一个内容块，所述至少一个内容块具有呈现属性；
    响应于接收到用于呈现所述文档的第二视图的指示，调整所述至少一个内容块的所述呈现属性；以及
    基于经调整的所述呈现属性，在所述第二视图中呈现所述至少一个内容块。
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的方法，其中调整所述呈现属性包括：
    基于所述指示，确定所述第二视图的类型；以及
    基于所述第二视图的类型，调整所述呈现属性。
  3. 根据权利要求2所述的方法，其中所述基于所述第二视图的类型调整所述呈现属性包括：响应于确定所述第二视图的类型包括演示类型，调整以下至少任一项：
    所述至少一个内容块在所述第二视图中的位置；
    所述至少一个内容块在所述第二视图中的尺寸；
    所述至少一个内容块在所述第二视图中的显示内容；
    所述至少一个内容块的组合布局方式。
  4. 根据权利要求3所述的方法，还包括：
    基于所述至少一个内容块的文字内容，向所述至少一个内容块指定图标；以及
    在所述至少一个内容块相关联的位置处，呈现所述图标。
  5. 根据权利要求3所述的方法，其中调整所述至少一个内容块的所述组合布局方式包括：
    响应于确定所述至少一个内容块包括第一类型的内容块和第二类型的内容块，将所述第一类型的内容块与所述第二类型的内容块进行组合 布局；或者，
    响应于确定所述至少一个内容块包括多个内容块，将所述多个内容块进行组合布局，所述多个内容块属于同一个父级内容块；或者，
    响应于确定所述至少一个内容块包括多个相同类型的内容块，将所述多个相同类型的内容块进行组合布局；或者，
    响应于确定所述至少一个内容块包括多个相同类型的内容块，并且所述多个相同类型的内容块的内容满足预设条件，将所述多个相同类型的内容块进行组合布局。
  6. 根据权利要求1所述的方法，还包括以下至少任一项：
    响应于接收到对在所述第二视图中呈现的分页控制元素的调整，调整所述第二视图的分页；
    响应于接收到对在所述第二视图中呈现的可见性控制元素的调整，调整所述至少一个内容块的可见性；
    响应于接收到对在所述第二视图中呈现的评论控制元素的调整，调整针对所述至少一个内容块的评论；
    响应于接收到对在所述第二视图中呈现的颜色控制元素的调整，调整针对所述至少一个内容块的颜色。
  7. 根据权利要求2所述的方法，其中所述基于所述第二视图的类型调整所述呈现属性包括：响应于确定所述第二视图的类型包括思维导图类型，
    确定所述至少一个内容块在所述第一视图中的标题层级；
    基于所述标题层级调整所述至少一个内容块的呈现属性，在思维导图视图中以所述呈现属性显示所述至少一个内容块。
  8. 根据权利要求7所述的方法，其中所述在所述思维导图视图中以所述呈现属性显示所述至少一个内容块包括：
    在所述思维导图视图中生成与所述至少一个内容块对应的节点；
    基于所述至少一个内容块的所述标题层级，确定所述节点在所述思 维导图视图中的层级结构；以及
    基于所述层级结构，在所述思维导图视图中呈现所述节点。
  9. 根据权利要求7所述的方法，所述至少一个内容块包括第一内容块和第二内容块，所述思维导图视图包括与所述第一内容块对应的第一节点和与所述第二内容块对应的第二节点，其中所述第一内容块为所述第一视图中的第一标题，所述第二内容块为所述第一视图中的第二标题；第一层级为所述第一标题在所述第一视图中的标题层级，第二层级为所述第二标题在所述第一视图中的标题层级。
  10. 根据权利要求9所述的方法，还包括：
    响应于确定所述第二内容块在所述第一视图中位于所述第一内容块之后，比较所述第二层级和所述第一层级；
    响应于确定所述第二层级低于所述第一层级，将所述第二节点设置为所述第一节点的子节点；或者，
    响应于确定所述第二层级等于所述第一层级，将所述第二节点设置为所述第一节点的兄弟节点；或者，
    响应于确定所述第二层级高于所述第一层级，基于所述第一节点的父节点与所述第二节点的比较，设置所述第二节点的层级结构。
  11. 根据权利要求10所述的方法，还包括：响应于检测到针对所述思维导图视图中的节点的编辑操作，对所述思维导图视图中的与所述节点对应的内容块进行相应更新。
  12. 根据权利要求11所述的方法，其中对所述思维导图视图中的与所述节点对应的内容块进行相应更新包括以下至少一项：
    响应于确定所述编辑操作调整所述第一节点在所述思维导图视图中的层级，调整所述第一内容块在所述思维导图视图中的第一层级；
    响应于确定所述编辑操作调整所述第一节点的内容，调整所述第一内容块的内容；
    响应于确定所述编辑操作调整所述第一节点和所述第二节点在所述 思维导图中的顺序，调整所述第一内容块和所述第二内容块在所述思维导图视图中的顺序；
    响应于确定所述编辑操作向所述思维导图视图中插入第三节点，向所述思维导图视图中插入与所述第三节点相对应的第三内容块；
    响应于确定所述编辑操作从所述思维导图视图中删除所述第一节点，从所述思维导图视图中删除所述第一内容块。
  13. 根据权利要求1-12中的任一项所述的方法，其中所述第一视图为文档视图、演示视图或思维导图视图中的任一项，所述第二视图为文档视图、演示视图或思维导图视图中与所述第一视图不同的另外项。
  14. 一种用于呈现文档的装置，包括：
    原始呈现模块，被配置为呈现文档的第一视图，所述文档包括至少一个内容块，所述至少一个内容块具有呈现属性；
    调整模块，被配置为响应于接收到用于呈现所述文档的第二视图的指示，调整所述至少一个内容块的所述呈现属性；以及
    目标呈现模块，被配置为基于经调整的所述呈现属性，在所述第二视图中呈现所述至少一个内容块。
  15. 一种电子设备，包括：
    至少一个处理单元；以及
    至少一个存储器，所述至少一个存储器被耦合到所述至少一个处理单元并且存储用于由所述至少一个处理单元执行的指令，所述指令在由所述至少一个处理单元执行时使所述设备执行根据权利要求1至13中的任一项所述的方法。
  16. 一种计算机可读存储介质，其上存储有计算机程序，所述计算机程序可由处理器执行以实现根据权利要求1至13中的任一项所述的方法。
  17. 一种文档演示的方法，包括：
    响应于在文档的编辑页面中接收到切换指示，呈现所述文档的演 示页面，所述演示页面包括在所述文档的编辑页面中输入的内容项的视图；以及
    响应于检测到对所述视图的触发指示，在所述演示页面内呈现所述内容项。
  18. 根据权利要求17所述的方法，其中呈现所述内容项包括：
    调用所述文档的应用框架，在所述文档的演示页面中构建浏览窗口，在所述浏览窗口中呈现所述内容项；或者
    调用承载所述文档的演示页面的页面框架，在所述文档的演示页面中构建浏览窗口，在所述浏览窗口中呈现所述内容项。
  19. 根据权利要求18所述的方法，其中在所述浏览窗口中呈现所述内容项包括：
    响应于所述内容项的第一内容页在所述浏览窗口中被呈现的同时检测到翻页指示，
    从所述浏览窗口移除对所述第一内容页的呈现；以及
    在所述浏览窗口中呈现所述内容项的第二内容页。
  20. 根据权利要求18所述的方法，其中所述浏览窗口包括滚动条控件，并且其中在所述浏览窗口中呈现所述内容项包括：
    响应于检测到针对所述滚动条控件的滚动操作来滚动呈现所述内容项。
  21. 根据权利要求18所述的方法，其中所述浏览窗口包括弹出窗口。
  22. 根据权利要求18所述的方法，还包括：
    响应于检测到对所述浏览窗口的关闭指示，关闭所述浏览窗口。
  23. 根据权利要求17所述的方法，其中所述视图属于以下视图之一：
    呈现与所述内容项相关联的第一信息的第一视图，所述第一视图在所述文档中占据第一面积，
    呈现与所述内容项相关联的第二信息的第二视图，所述第二视图在所述文档中占据超过所述第一面积的第二面积，
    呈现与所述内容项相关联的第三信息的第三视图，所述第三视图在所述文档中占据超过所述第二面积的第三面积。
  24. 根据权利要求23所述的方法，其中所述视图包括所述第三视图，并且其中呈现所述内容项包括：
    在所述演示页面中所述第三视图的位置处呈现所述内容项。
  25. 根据权利要求17所述的方法，还包括：
    在所述文档的所述编辑页面中，检测针对所述内容项的视图切换指示，所述视图切换指示用于指示将所述视图切换到另一视图；以及
    响应于检测到所述视图切换指示，在所述文档中将所述视图切换为另一视图。
  26. 根据权利要求17所述的方法，还包括：
    在所述文档的所述编辑页面中，检测针对所述内容项的视图编辑指示，所述视图编辑指示用于指示对所述视图的布局的修改；以及
    基于所述视图编辑指示来修改所述视图的布局。
  27. 根据权利要求17所述的方法，还包括：
    在所述文档的所述演示页面中接收对所述编辑页面中输入的内容的展示指令；以及
    拒绝接收对所述内容的编辑指令。
  28. 根据权利要求17所述的方法，还包括：
    响应于在所述文档的所述编辑页面中对所述内容项的视图的触发，跳转到所述编辑页面之外的页面来显示所述内容项。
  29. 一种文档演示的方法，包括：
    响应于接收到对文档中内容项的视图的触发指示，确定所述文档当前的页面类型；
    响应于所述页面类型为编辑页面，跳转到所述编辑页面之外的页面来呈现所述内容项；以及
    响应于所述页面类型为演示页面，在所述演示页面内呈现所述内容项。
  30. 根据权利要求29所述的方法，还包括：
    响应于在所述文档的所述编辑页面中接收到切换指示，呈现所述文档的所述演示页面，所述演示页面包括在所述文档的所述编辑页面中输入的内容项的视图；以及
    响应于检测到对所述视图的触发指示，在所述演示页面内呈现所述内容项。
  31. 根据权利要求29所述的方法，其中在所述演示页面内呈现所述内容项包括：
    调用所述文档的应用框架，在所述文档的演示页面中构建浏览窗口，在所述浏览窗口中呈现所述内容项；或者
    调用承载所述文档的演示页面的页面框架，在所述文档的演示页面中构建浏览窗口，在所述浏览窗口中呈现所述内容项。
  32. 根据权利要求29所述的方法，还包括：
    在所述文档的编辑页面中，检测针对所述内容项的视图切换指示，所述视图切换指示用于指示将所述视图切换到另一视图；
    响应于检测到所述视图切换指示，在所述文档中将所述视图切换为另一视图；
    在所述文档的编辑页面中，检测针对所述内容项的视图编辑指示，所述视图编辑指示用于指示对所述视图的布局的修改；以及
    基于所述视图编辑指示来修改所述视图的布局。
  33. 一种用于文档演示的装置，包括：
    演示页面呈现模块，被配置为响应于在文档的编辑页面中接收到切换指示，呈现所述文档的演示页面，所述演示页面包括在所述文档的编辑页面中输入的内容项的视图；以及
    内容项呈现模块，被配置为响应于检测到对所述视图的触发指示，在所述演示页面内呈现所述内容项。
  34. 一种用于文档演示的装置，包括：
    页面类型确定模块，被配置为响应于接收到对文档中内容项的视图的触发指示，确定所述文档当前的页面类型；
    页面跳转模块，被配置为响应于所述页面类型为编辑页面，跳转 到所述编辑页面之外的页面来呈现所述内容项；以及
    演示页面呈现模块，被配置为响应于所述页面类型为演示页面，在所述演示页面内呈现所述内容项。
  35. 一种电子设备，包括：
    至少一个处理单元；以及
    至少一个存储器，所述至少一个存储器被耦合到所述至少一个处理单元并且存储用于由所述至少一个处理单元执行的指令，所述指令在由所述至少一个处理单元执行时使所述设备执行根据权利要求17至28或者29至32中任一项所述的方法。
  36. 一种计算机可读存储介质，其上存储有计算机程序，所述计算机程序可由处理器执行以实现根据权利要求17至28或者29至32中任一项所述的方法。
  37. 一种文档交互的方法，包括：
    在第一终端设备处，在文档被演示的同时在所述文档的演示视图中呈现所述文档的访问路径信息；以及
    基于至少一个第二终端设备发起的包括所述访问路径信息的访问请求，将所述文档提供给所述至少一个第二终端设备。
  38. 根据权利要求37所述的方法，其中将所述文档提供给所述至少一个第二终端设备包括：
    将所述文档的所述演示视图提供给所述至少一个第二终端设备。
  39. 根据权利要求37所述的方法，还包括：
    从所述至少一个第二终端设备获得针对所述文档的至少一个片段的评论信息；以及
    将所述评论信息关联到所述文档的所述至少一个片段。
  40. 根据权利要求37所述的方法，其中呈现所述文档的访问路径信息包括：
    检测对所述文档的演示时分享指示；以及
    响应于检测到所述演示时分享指示，呈现所述文档的所述访问路径信息。
  41. 根据权利要求37所述的方法，还包括：
    如果在所述文档被演示的同时接收到所述评论信息，暂缓呈现关于所述评论信息的提示。
  42. 根据权利要求37所述的方法，还包括：
    检测针对所述评论信息的允许呈现指示；以及
    响应于检测到所述允许呈现指示，在所述文档的所述演示视图中呈现所述评论信息。
  43. 根据权利要求42所述的方法，还包括：
    向所述至少一个第二终端设备提供所述允许呈现指示，以使所述评论信息被呈现在所述至少一个第二终端设备处。
  44. 一种文档交互的方法，包括：
    在第二终端设备处，获取文档的访问路径信息，所述文档在所述第一终端设备处正被演示；
    发起针对所述文档的访问请求，所述访问请求包括所述访问路径信息；
    接收所述文档的演示视图；以及
    在演示模式下呈现所述文档的所述演示视图。
  45. 根据权利要求44所述的方法，其中呈现所述文档的所述演示视图包括：
    在所述演示模式下，根据所述文档在所述第一终端设备处的演示进度来呈现所述文档的所述演示视图。
  46. 根据权利要求44所述的方法，还包括：
    如果检测到演示退出指示，退出所述演示模式；
    检测所述文档在所述第二终端设备处的浏览进度；以及
    基于检测到的所述浏览进度来呈现所述文档的页面视图。
  47. 根据权利要求46所述的方法，还包括：
    如果检测到演示跟随指示，进入所述演示模式；以及
    根据所述文档在所述第一终端设备处的演示进度来呈现所述文档的所述演示视图。
  48. 根据权利要求46所述的方法，还包括：
    如果检测到演示定位指示，根据所述文档在所述第一终端设备处的演示进度来呈现所述文档的页面视图。
  49. 根据权利要求44所述的方法，其中呈现所述文档的所述演示视图包括：
    在所述演示模式下，检测所述文档在所述第二终端设备处的浏览进度；以及
    基于检测到的所述浏览进度来呈现所述文档的所述演示视图。
  50. 根据权利要求49所述的方法，其中呈现所述文档的所述演示视图还包括：
    如果检测到演示定位指示，根据所述文档在所述第一终端设备处的演示进度来呈现所述文档的所述演示视图。
  51. 根据权利要求44所述的方法，还包括：
    接收针对所述文档的至少一个文档片段的评论信息；以及
    将所述评论信息提供给所述第一终端设备。
  52. 根据权利要求44所述的方法，还包括：
    从所述第一终端设备接收针对所述评论信息的允许呈现指示；以及
    响应于所述允许呈现指示，在所述文档的所述演示视图中呈现所述评论信息。
  53. 根据权利要求44所述的方法，还包括：
    存储关于所述文档的访问记录，所述访问记录至少包括所述文档的所述访问路径信息。
  54. 一种用于文档交互的第一装置，包括：
    访问路径呈现模块，被配置为在文档被演示的同时在所述文档的演示视图中呈现所述文档的访问路径信息；以及
    视图提供模块，被配置为基于至少一个第二装置发起的包括所述访问路径信息的访问请求，将所述文档发送给所述至少一个第二装置。
  55. 根据权利要求54所述的第一装置，其中所述视图提供模块被 配置为：将所述文档的所述演示视图发送给所述至少一个第二装置。
  56. 一种用于文档交互的第二装置，包括：
    访问获取模块，被配置为获取文档的访问路径信息，所述文档在所述第一装置处正被演示；
    请求发起模块，被配置为发起针对所述文档的访问请求，所述访问请求包括所述访问路径信息；
    视图接收模块，被配置为接收所述文档的演示视图；以及
    视图呈现模块，被配置为在演示模式下呈现所述文档的所述演示视图。
  57. 一种电子设备，包括：
    至少一个处理单元；以及
    至少一个存储器，所述至少一个存储器被耦合到所述至少一个处理单元并且存储用于由所述至少一个处理单元执行的指令，所述指令在由所述至少一个处理单元执行时使所述设备执行根据权利要求37至43中任一项所述的方法或权利要求44至53中任一项所述的方法。
  58. 一种计算机可读存储介质，其上存储有计算机程序，所述计算机程序可由处理器执行以实现根据权利要求37至43中任一项所述的方法或权利要求44至53中任一项所述的方法。
  59. 一种文档内容的显示方法，包括：
    在文档的当前视图下，接收对文档内的内容块中的目标内容块的选择操作，以确定所述目标内容块；
    在所述目标内容块被确定时，接收对所述目标内容块的内容演示指示；
    基于所述目标内容块生成包括至少一个内容页面的目标视图，所述目标内容块的内容显示在所述至少一个内容页面中。
  60. 根据权利要求59所述的方法，其中响应于所述当前视图为第一视图，所述接收对文档内的内容块中的目标内容块的选择操作，确定所述目标内容块包括以下至少一项：
    获取当前焦点的移动路径，将所述移动路径上的内容块作为选择 的所述目标内容块；
    确定当前焦点所在位置对应的内容块，根据快捷选择指示将所述内容块作为所述目标内容块。
  61. 根据权利要求59所述的方法，其中响应于所述当前视图为第二视图，所述第二视图基于第一视图生成，所述接收对文档内的内容块中的目标内容块的选择操作，确定所述目标内容块包括：
    响应于接收到内容筛选的指示，确定所述第二视图下的全部内容块，在每一个所述内容块的关联位置生成预设标记；
    接收对所述预设标记的编辑操作；以及
    基于对所述预设标记的所述编辑操作确定所述目标内容块。
  62. 根据权利要求61所述的方法，其中所述预设标记具有未选中的初始状态，并且
    接收对所述预设标记的编辑操作包括：
    接收对所述预设标记的确认选中。
  63. 根据权利要求61所述的方法，其中所述预设标记具有被选中的初始状态，并且
    其中接收对所述预设标记的编辑操作包括：
    接收对所述预设标记的取消选中。
  64. 根据权利要求62或63所述的方法，其中基于所述编辑操作确定所述目标内容块包括：
    将与经过所述编辑操作后被选中的所述预设标记对应的所述内容块确定为所述目标内容块。
  65. 根据权利要求59所述的方法，其中响应于所述当前视图为第一视图，所述在所述目标内容块被确定时，接收对所述目标内容块的内容演示指示，包括：
    在任一被确定的所述目标内容块的关联位置显示第一控件，通过所述第一控件接收对所述目标内容块的内容演示指示。
  66. 根据权利要求59所述的方法，其中响应于所述当前视图为第二视图，所述第二视图基于第一视图生成，所述在所述目标内容块被 确定时，接收对所述目标内容块的内容演示指示，包括：
    在所述第二视图的页面中的预设位置显示第二控件，通过所述第二控件接收对所述目标内容块的内容演示指示。
  67. 根据权利要求59所述的方法，其中所述基于所述目标内容块生成包括至少一个内容页面的目标视图包括：
    根据所述目标内容块的类型、内容量和内容关联度中的至少一项，确定所述目标视图包括的内容页面的数量；以及
    将所述目标内容块显示在对应的所述内容页面中。
  68. 根据权利要求67所述的方法，其中确定所述目标视图包括的内容页面的数量包括：
    根据所述目标内容块的内容量与内容页面的大小，确定所述目标视图包括的内容页面的所述数量。
  69. 根据权利要求67所述的方法，其中确定所述目标视图包括的内容页面的数量包括：
    根据所述目标内容块的类型或者内容关联度在内容页面中布局所述目标内容块，将所述目标内容块中类型相同或者内容相关联的内容块布局在同一内容页面中；以及
    根据所述目标内容块的所述布局，确定所述目标视图包括的内容页面的所述数量。
  70. 根据权利要求59所述的方法，还包括：
    在所述目标内容块被确定时，接收对所述目标内容块的内容导出指示；
    响应于检测到所述内容导出指示，将所述目标内容块保存为另一文档。
  71. 根据权利要求59所述的方法，若所述当前视图下的所述目标内容块中包括互动标识，所述基于所述目标内容块生成包括至少一个内容页面的目标视图，包括：
    在所述目标视图中与所述目标内容块对应的内容中隐藏所述互动标识。
  72. 根据权利要求59所述的方法，若所述当前视图下的所述目标内容块中包括互动标识，所述基于所述目标内容块生成包括至少一个内容页面的目标视图，包括：
    在所述目标视图中与所述目标内容块对应的内容中显示所述互动标识。
  73. 根据权利要求71或72所述的方法，所述方法还包括：
    响应于对所述互动标识的触发操作，在所述目标视图的相应内容页面中显示互动内容。
  74. 根据权利要求59所述的方法，在所述文档的框架内可承载一个或多个内容块，所述内容块为所述文档的最小编辑单元。
  75. 一种用于文档内容的显示的装置，包括：
    目标内容块确定模块，被配置为在文档的当前视图下，接收对文档内的内容块中的目标内容块的选择操作，确定所述目标内容块；
    内容演示指示接收模块，被配置为在所述目标内容块被确定时，接收对所述目标内容块的内容演示指示；以及
    目标视图生成模块，被配置为基于所述目标内容块生成包括至少一个内容页面的目标视图，所述目标内容块的内容显示在所述至少一个内容页面中。
  76. 一种电子设备，包括：
    至少一个处理单元；以及
    至少一个存储器，所述至少一个存储器被耦合到所述至少一个处理单元并且存储用于由所述至少一个处理单元执行的指令，所述指令在由所述至少一个处理单元执行时使所述设备执行根据权利要求59至74中任一项所述的方法。
  77. 一种计算机可读存储介质，其上存储有计算机程序，所述计算机程序可由处理器执行以实现根据权利要求59至74中任一项所述的方法。
PCT/CN2023/120499 2022-10-31 2023-09-21 用于呈现文档的方法、装置、设备和存储介质 WO2024093572A1 (zh)

Applications Claiming Priority (8)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN202211351337.8 2022-10-31
CN202211351629.1A CN115640782A (zh) 2022-10-31 2022-10-31 用于文档演示的方法、装置、设备和存储介质
CN202211351678.5A CN115640783A (zh) 2022-10-31 2022-10-31 用于文档内容显示的方法、装置、设备和存储介质
CN202211351337.8A CN115659909A (zh) 2022-10-31 2022-10-31 用于呈现文档的方法、装置、设备和存储介质
CN202211345566.9 2022-10-31
CN202211345566.9A CN115657903A (zh) 2022-10-31 2022-10-31 文档交互的方法、装置、设备和存储介质
CN202211351678.5 2022-10-31
CN202211351629.1 2022-10-31

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2024093572A1 true WO2024093572A1 (zh) 2024-05-10

Family

ID=90929664

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2023/120499 WO2024093572A1 (zh) 2022-10-31 2023-09-21 用于呈现文档的方法、装置、设备和存储介质

Country Status (1)

Country Link
WO (1) WO2024093572A1 (zh)

Citations (13)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN103577433A (zh) * 2012-07-26 2014-02-12 百度在线网络技术（北京）有限公司 页面智能化浏览方法、系统以及装置
KR101417842B1 (ko) * 2012-07-11 2014-07-09 정영교 문서작성과 실시간으로 연동되는 마인드맵 생성방법, 장치 및 컴퓨터로 판독 가능한 기록매체
CN107257376A (zh) * 2017-06-20 2017-10-17 永中软件股份有限公司 会议文档在线同步方法
CN108647305A (zh) * 2018-05-09 2018-10-12 天津字节跳动科技有限公司 文档格式转换方法和装置
CN110162748A (zh) * 2019-05-27 2019-08-23 北京字节跳动网络技术有限公司 文档处理方法、装置、设备及存储介质
US10430838B1 (en) * 2016-06-28 2019-10-01 Snap Inc. Methods and systems for generation, curation, and presentation of media collections with automated advertising
CN110597774A (zh) * 2019-09-13 2019-12-20 腾讯科技（深圳）有限公司 一种文件分享方法、系统、装置、计算设备及终端设备
CN111881652A (zh) * 2020-06-11 2020-11-03 广州数鹏通科技有限公司 基于动态数据的演示文稿方法、系统及计算机终端设备
CN111985203A (zh) * 2020-08-14 2020-11-24 维沃移动通信有限公司 文档处理方法、文档处理装置和电子设备
CN115640782A (zh) * 2022-10-31 2023-01-24 北京字跳网络技术有限公司 用于文档演示的方法、装置、设备和存储介质
CN115640783A (zh) * 2022-10-31 2023-01-24 北京字跳网络技术有限公司 用于文档内容显示的方法、装置、设备和存储介质
CN115659909A (zh) * 2022-10-31 2023-01-31 北京字跳网络技术有限公司 用于呈现文档的方法、装置、设备和存储介质
CN115657903A (zh) * 2022-10-31 2023-01-31 北京字跳网络技术有限公司 文档交互的方法、装置、设备和存储介质

Patent Citations (13)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
KR101417842B1 (ko) * 2012-07-11 2014-07-09 정영교 문서작성과 실시간으로 연동되는 마인드맵 생성방법, 장치 및 컴퓨터로 판독 가능한 기록매체
CN103577433A (zh) * 2012-07-26 2014-02-12 百度在线网络技术（北京）有限公司 页面智能化浏览方法、系统以及装置
US10430838B1 (en) * 2016-06-28 2019-10-01 Snap Inc. Methods and systems for generation, curation, and presentation of media collections with automated advertising
CN107257376A (zh) * 2017-06-20 2017-10-17 永中软件股份有限公司 会议文档在线同步方法
CN108647305A (zh) * 2018-05-09 2018-10-12 天津字节跳动科技有限公司 文档格式转换方法和装置
CN110162748A (zh) * 2019-05-27 2019-08-23 北京字节跳动网络技术有限公司 文档处理方法、装置、设备及存储介质
CN110597774A (zh) * 2019-09-13 2019-12-20 腾讯科技（深圳）有限公司 一种文件分享方法、系统、装置、计算设备及终端设备
CN111881652A (zh) * 2020-06-11 2020-11-03 广州数鹏通科技有限公司 基于动态数据的演示文稿方法、系统及计算机终端设备
CN111985203A (zh) * 2020-08-14 2020-11-24 维沃移动通信有限公司 文档处理方法、文档处理装置和电子设备
CN115640782A (zh) * 2022-10-31 2023-01-24 北京字跳网络技术有限公司 用于文档演示的方法、装置、设备和存储介质
CN115640783A (zh) * 2022-10-31 2023-01-24 北京字跳网络技术有限公司 用于文档内容显示的方法、装置、设备和存储介质
CN115659909A (zh) * 2022-10-31 2023-01-31 北京字跳网络技术有限公司 用于呈现文档的方法、装置、设备和存储介质
CN115657903A (zh) * 2022-10-31 2023-01-31 北京字跳网络技术有限公司 文档交互的方法、装置、设备和存储介质

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
Edhlund et al. NVivo 12 essentials
US8949729B2 (en) Enhanced copy and paste between applications
Mynatt et al. Flatland: New dimensions in office whiteboards
Edhlund et al. Nvivo 11 essentials
US20150339375A1 (en) Web application for debate maps
US11960525B2 (en) Automatically formatting content items for presentation
US6279014B1 (en) Method and system for organizing documents based upon annotations in context
US10204085B2 (en) Display and selection of bidirectional text
Edhlund Nvivo 9 essentials
US20090022474A1 (en) Content Editing and Generating System
US20030097640A1 (en) System and method for creating and editing documents
US20120159318A1 (en) Full screen view reading and editing user interface
JP2009506461A (ja) ユーザ・インターフェース向けマークアップ・ベースの拡張性
KR20070122218A (ko) 다중-값 속성을 표시하고 편집하기 위한 시스템 및 방법
US20130262968A1 (en) Apparatus and method for efficiently reviewing patent documents
US20180039397A1 (en) System and method for organizing and presenting data using zooming user interface blocks
US10175850B2 (en) Search inquiry method using contextual annotation
US9727547B2 (en) Media interface tools and animations
CN115659909A (zh) 用于呈现文档的方法、装置、设备和存储介质
CN112040142B (zh) 用于移动终端上的视频创作的方法
Wu et al. Turning a page on the digital annotation of physical books
WO2024093572A1 (zh) 用于呈现文档的方法、装置、设备和存储介质
CN104424237A (zh) 白板教学系统附件预览方法及其白板教学系统
Carriço et al. Spoken Books: Multimodal Interaction and Information Repurposing.
CN113901776A (zh) 音频交互方法、介质、装置和计算设备